JP6729506B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is equipped with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine, a configuration is also known in which an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part are provided as a plate storage part. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launches. The game balls which are guided by the device and become excess in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

JP, 2009-261415, A

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably managing the gaming machine.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 sets a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the degree of advantage of the player,
History storage executing means for storing history information of the game corresponding to the predetermined event due to the execution of the game in the history storage means,
Information derivation means for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means,
First display control means for controlling the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information deriving means is performed,
In a changeable situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed, the information corresponding to the currently selected setting value is displayed while the display corresponding to the mode information is not performed. Second display control means for controlling the display of the information display means,
The setting value to be used set in the changeable situation is stored in the history storage means in a specific situation in which the setting value to be used is the same as the setting value set before the start of the changeable situation. Means for preventing the history information that is present from being deleted,
Erase, which is a process performed after the process for changing the setting value to be used in the changeable state is executed, and is a process for deleting the history information stored in the history storage means Means for performing processing,
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably manage a gaming machine.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a configuration of a game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure regarding the discharge of the game ball which flowed down the game area. It is a front view of a main controller. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for win/win lottery. It is an explanatory view for explaining various tables memorized by main side ROM. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the master side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value update processing performed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the special figure special electric power control processing performed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation|variation start process performed by the main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure which makes the detection result of a ball detection sensor input into a main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the entrance detection processing performed by the main side CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining an electric configuration of a payout control device and various devices that communicate with the payout control device. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing performed by a payment side CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining an electric configuration of a management IC. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the input port of the management side I/F. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of a correspondence memory. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of a history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the management processing performed by the management side CPU. (A) ~ (d) is a time chart showing a state in which information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory. It is a flow chart which shows management output processing performed by the master side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows history setting processing performed by a management side CPU. 8A to 8E are time charts showing how history information is stored in the history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the output processing of the setting value update signal performed by the main side CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. It is a flow chart which shows display output processing performed by a management side CPU. 8 is a flowchart showing a display process executed by the management-side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the data output process performed by (a) main side CPU, and is a flowchart which shows the external output process performed by (b) management side CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining various tables memorized by main side ROM in a 2nd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for another preservation|save in 3rd Embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing a monitoring process of repeated changes executed by the management CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring process of the repeated change performed by the main side CPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a setting update recognition performed by the management side CPU in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for history records in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows history setting processing performed by a management side CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for history in 7th Embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for history records in 8th Embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. It is a flow chart which shows history setting processing performed by a management side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows display output processing performed by a management side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of the management side I/F in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the management processing performed by the management side CPU. (A) ~ (h) is a time chart showing a state in which information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the signal path which transmits the detection result of each ball detection sensor in 10th Embodiment to the main side CPU and management IC.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main components of the pachinko machine 10. Note that, in FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward. Have. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plate members to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. The outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the island frame of the game hall may be equipped with the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward when the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side when viewed from the front.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be turned forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. A back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation front end side in front view.

In addition, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating front end, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 in a locked state, and The door frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so that the door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 guide the means. The guide rail as is configured. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

By the way, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying game balls stored in an upper plate 55a described later onto the launch rail 27a, and a launch rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. By rotating the firing operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, the solenoid 27c is drive-controlled, and the game ball is fired.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 31, a special electricity winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a universal drawing unit 38, etc. are provided in each opening. ing. A total of four general winning openings 31 are provided, and one is provided for each other.

Even if the ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 occur, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Regarding the number of prize balls, specifically, when one game ball enters the first operation port 33 or when one game ball enters the second operation port 34. The payout of one prize ball is executed, and when one game ball is inserted into the general winning opening 31, the payout of ten prize balls is executed and the special prize winning device 32 is displayed. When one of the game balls is entered, the payout of 15 prize balls is executed.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls may be smaller in the second operating port 34 than in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may be the first operating port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a wind turbine are provided.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to be clearly distinguished from the game ball entering the outlet 24a, a general prize hole 31, a special electric prize winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, and a through gate 35. Entering a game ball into is also referred to as a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are open upward. Further, the both operating ports 33, 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operating port 33 faces upward. The second working port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the universal electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the universal electric object 34a is in the open state, the prize can enter the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operation port 34 in the downflow direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning of the through-gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is triggered by winning the prize in the through gate 35, and a public figure display of the general figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area in the game area PA where the game balls do not pass. The variable display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric power combination opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the universal graphic display portion 38a is ended, the operation shifts to the universal electric open state. In the general electric open state, the general electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

Note that the general-purpose display section 38a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device. , A CRT, a dot matrix display, or other type of display device. Further, as the pattern variably displayed on the universal figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the universal figure unit 38, a universal figure hold display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal figure display section 38a. The maximum number of game balls that have won in the through gate 35 is four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the universal figure reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is carried out with the winning of the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special drawing unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

More specifically, the special drawing unit 37 is provided with a special drawing display portion 37a. The display area of the special figure display portion 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display portion 37a, a winning or lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating opening 33 or the winning of the second operating opening 34 as a trigger, whereby a variable display or a predetermined display of the design is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The special figure display unit 37a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , A CRT, a dot matrix display, or other type of display device. As the picture displayed on the special figure display portion 37a, a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors. A configuration in which is displayed is considered.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure reservation display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The maximum number of game balls that have won in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the special figure pending display portion 37b.

In detail about the symbol display device 41, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. May be.

In the symbol display device 41, when the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is performed on the special symbol display portion 37a based on the winning in the first operating port 33 or the winning in the second operating port 34, the symbol is displayed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows of upper, middle, and lower rows are set as a plurality of display areas, and each of the symbol rows is labeled with a number "1" to "9". The symbols are scroll-displayed with the symbols arranged in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, the scroll display in all the symbol rows is first started, and the scroll display is switched from the scroll display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row, the lower symbol row, and the middle symbol row, and finally in each symbol row It ends with the pattern still displayed. Then, in the game times in which the game result is a jackpot result, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the preset effective line on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the same odd symbol combination is stopped and displayed when the most advantageous jackpot result described later is displayed, and the same even symbol combination is stopped and displayed when the low-probability jackpot result described later is displayed. If it is a low winning high certainty jackpot result, it is not the same symbol combination, but if it is not a low winning high certainty jackpot result, the symbol combination that is not stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by the winning of the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34, but also the display effect in the opening/closing execution mode which is shifted after the winning is achieved. Be seen. In addition, based on the winning in one of the operation ports 33, 34, the display is started on the special figure display portion 37a and the symbol display device 41, and a predetermined result is displayed and ended until the game time is 1 Equivalent to times. Further, the manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol columns, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the picture variably displayed on the picture display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned picture, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the picture.

When a big hit is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the first working opening 33 or the winning of the second working opening 34, the opening/closing execution mode in which it is possible to win the special electric prize winning device 32 is performed. The special electric winning device 32 is provided with a big winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The open/close door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and when the game is transferred to the open/close execution mode in the internal lottery, the game balls can be switched to an open state in which prizes can be won. It has become. By the way, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a winning result is obtained. It should be noted that in the closed state, the winning is not impossible, but the winning state may be less likely to occur than in the opened state.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to the discharge of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

As described above, the game balls that enter the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a are discharged from the game area PA. In other words, the game ball shot from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is any one of the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a. By entering the ball, it will be discharged from the game area PA. The game ball that has entered the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, or the out opening 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed corresponding to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a. .. The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the flowed out discharge passages 42 to 48, and to the discharge ball collecting portion (not shown). Be recovered. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collecting section are discharged to the ball circulating device of the island facility in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting a game ball are provided in the respective discharge passage portions 42 to 48. The discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since the four general winning openings 31 are provided as described above, the discharge passage portions 42 to 44 are provided corresponding to each of the four. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the right general winning opening 31 adjacent thereto. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided such that the detection range exists in the middle position of the first discharge passage portion 42, and the detection range is formed in the middle position of the second discharge passage portion 43. The second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball that has entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage portion 42, and the game that entered the general winning opening 31 on the right side thereof. The ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage portion 43. Further, a third discharge passage portion 44 formed so as to join at the middle position with respect to the two right general winning openings 31 is provided. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an entrance side area corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and also has one exit side area due to the entrance side areas joining in the middle. doing. The third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that the detection range exists at an intermediate position of the outlet side region of the third discharge passage portion 44. The game ball that has entered one of the two right winning openings 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 44.

The fourth discharge passage portion 45 is provided so as to correspond to the special electric winning device 32. The special electricity detection sensor 45a is provided so that the detection range exists at the midway position of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and the game ball entering the special electricity prize winning device 32 is in the middle of passing through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. The fifth discharge passage portion 46 is provided so as to correspond to the first operation port 33. The first working port detection sensor 46a is provided so that the detection range is present at an intermediate position of the fifth discharging passage portion 46, and the game sphere that has entered the first working opening 33 moves through the fifth discharging passage portion 46. During the passage, it is detected by the first working port detection sensor 46a. The sixth discharge passage portion 47 is provided so as to correspond to the second operation port 34. The second working port detection sensor 47a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharging passage part 47, and the game ball entering the second working port 34 moves through the sixth discharging passage part 47. During the passage, it is detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a. The seventh discharge passage portion 48 is provided so as to correspond to the outlet 24a. The outlet detection sensor 48a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 48, and the game ball entering the outlet 24a is in the middle of passing through the seventh discharge passage portion 48. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

In addition, the game ball detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a will not be detected by the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. Further, a gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a game ball passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

An electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used as each of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect a game ball. Further, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are electrically connected to a main control device 60 described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal when the game ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal when the game ball is detected. The relationship between HI and LOW is not limited to this, and may be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided with a window portion 51 that allows almost the entire game area PA to be viewed from the front. The window 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be made of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, and the game area PA is provided from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. If it is visible, it may be formed to be colored and transparent.

A display light emitting portion 53 is provided above the window portion 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 54 for outputting a sound effect according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulge portion 55 and a lower bulge portion 56 which bulge toward the front side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a line. Further, the lower plate 56a has a function of storing game balls that have become redundant in the upper plate 55a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main controller 60 that controls the main control of the game is mounted. FIG. 5 is a front view of main controller 60.

As shown in FIG. 5, the main controller 60 has a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. The MPU 62 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one plate surface of the main control board 61. The board box 60a is formed transparent so that the MPU 62 housed in the board box 60a can be viewed from the outside of the board box 60a. Although the substrate box 60a is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 62 housed in the substrate box 60a can be viewed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. The main controller 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 in the board box 60a faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 to expose the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to visually recognize the facing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a. The MPU 62 can be viewed through the facing wall portion 60b.

The board box 60a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 60c in the front and back. The plurality of case bodies 60c prevent separation of the case bodies 60c and traces of the case bodies 60c when they are separated. Is provided with a coupling portion 60e for leaving. A plurality of coupling portions 60e are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 60a. Accordingly, even if the case body 60c is separated by destroying the part of the joint portion 60e while the separation of the case body 60c is prevented by using the part of the joint portion 60e, another joint is performed after that. By separating the part 60e, the case body 60c can be prevented from being separated again. Further, when the case body 60c is separated, the joint portion 60e is destroyed and a trace thereof remains, so that it is possible to visually confirm the joint portion 60e to grasp whether or not the case body 60c is illegally separated. It will be possible. Further, a seal sticker 60f is attached to one side of the substrate box 60a opposite to one side where the coupling portions 60e are arranged in parallel so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 60c. When the sealing seal 60f is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body 60c. As a result, when the sealing seal 60f is peeled off when the case body 60c is separated, the trace can be left.

In the main control device 60 having the above-mentioned configuration, the main control board 61 is owned by the manager of the game hall in order to generate an opportunity to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the range of "setting 1" to "setting 6". A setting key insertion portion 68a that is turned on by inserting a setting key, an update button 68b that is operated to sequentially change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on, and a main controller. A reset button 68c operated to clear data of a main RAM 65 described later provided in the MPU 62 of 60, and first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying a game history management result. , Are provided. Further, the MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 is connected to the connection terminal of the external device in order to read the management result of the game history or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 by the external device. A reading terminal 68d is provided for reading. The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to the six stages of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and any number of stages can be set.

The setting key insertion portion 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, the reading terminal 68d (that is, the MPU 62), and the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are all provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61. ing. The element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the facing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a as described above, but the setting key insertion portion 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the reading terminal 68d face each other. It is not covered by the wall 60b. That is, in the facing wall portion 60b, the areas facing the setting key insertion portion 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the reading terminal 68d are individual openings. As a result, the setting key can be inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a without pressing the board box 60a, the update button 68b can be pressed, and the reset button 68c can be pressed. It is possible to connect the connection terminal of the external device to the reading terminal 68d.

By inserting the setting key into the setting key inserting section 68a and rotating the setting key in a predetermined direction, the setting key inserting section 68a is turned on. It is possible to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by starting the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 in that state (that is, by starting the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). It becomes possible to change. Then, each time the update button 68b is pressed once in this state, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed step by step in the ascending order within the range of "setting 1" to "setting 6". When the update button 68b is operated in the state of "setting 6", the setting is updated to "setting 1". In addition, by rotating the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion portion 68a in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction from the position of the ON operation and returning it to the initial position, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned OFF. Become. When the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off, the changeable state ends, and the game can be played in the state of the set value at that time. That is, the set value cannot be changed even if the update button 68b is operated after the changeable state ends.

The ON operation to the setting key insertion portion 68a is valid only when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is started). Therefore, even if the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 performs an ON operation on the setting key insertion portion 68a after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is completed, the setting value cannot be changed.

The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 determines the degree of advantage per unit time in the pachinko machine 10, and the larger the value of n in the “setting n” (n is an integer of “1” to “6”) (that is, the setting). The higher the value, the higher the advantage. Although details will be described later, there are a low-probability mode in which the winning probability is relatively low and a high-probability mode in which the winning probability is relatively high as win/loss lottery modes for determining the winning probability of the jackpot result, and the set value is The higher the probability, the higher the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode is set. On the other hand, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high-probability mode is constant regardless of the set value.

The reset button 68c is operated to clear the data in the main RAM 65 as described above, but in order to generate the clearing of the data, the reset button 68c is pressed and supplied with operating power to the pachinko machine 10. Must be started (that is, the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 must be started). The ON operation to the reset button 68c is valid only when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if the reset button 68c is pressed after the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is completed, the data in the main RAM 65 cannot be cleared.

As described above, the reading terminal 68d is connected to the connection terminal of the external device in order to read the game history management result or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 by the external device. In order to perform the external output to the pachinko machine 10 in the state where the connection terminal of the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d (that is, the operation of the main controller 60 to the MPU 62 is required). It is necessary to start the power supply). The connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is valid only when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the external output to the external device is not performed.

Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is a segment display in which seven display segments by LEDs are arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a single multicolor light emission type is provided. It may be a light emitting body, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is installed so that the display surface thereof faces the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces, and the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a is used. Is covered. In this case, since the substrate box 60a is formed transparent, the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c housed in the substrate box 60a are visually observed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. It becomes possible. Further, as already described, the main controller 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 such that the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 in the board box 60a faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 to expose the back surface of the resin base 21 to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to third notifications are made through the facing wall portion 60b. The display surfaces of the display devices 69a to 69c can be visually checked.

On the display surface of the first notification display device 69a, not only the numbers "0" to "9" but also various characters including alphabetic characters are displayed. On the other hand, the numbers 0 to 9 are displayed on the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c. The management results of the game history are notified using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the contents of this notification will be described in detail later. Further, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. The value corresponding to the set value may be displayed on the first notification display device 69a or may be displayed on the second notification display device 69b. Further, the set value before the changeable state is displayed on one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the current setting value is set to the first to third notifications. It may be configured to be displayed on another one of the notification display devices 69a to 69c.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the payout mechanism unit 73 and the control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game ball paid out from the payout device 76 is discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with a main power supply of, for example, 24 V AC, and a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power supply.

The control device gathering unit 74 generates and outputs a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76, and predetermined power required by various control devices and the like, and accompanies the player's operation of the firing operation device 28. It is provided with a power supply/launching control device 78 for controlling the launch of a game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged in front and back so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game, and a power failure monitor board 67 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 contains a main side ROM 64, a main side RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to the main side CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. In addition to the above-described elements, the MPU 62 contains an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The main-side ROM 64 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage storage (that is, a non-volatile storage unit), and is used as a read-only memory. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data.

The main RAM 65 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) such as an SRAM and a DRAM that needs power supply from the outside to retain the storage, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 can be randomly accessed and has a shorter read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data and the like for execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the game history based on the information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although the details will be described later, while the management IC 66 grasps the entry history of the game ball into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, The frequency of entering the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is ascertained according to the obtained winning history. Further, the management IC 66 grasps the occurrence frequencies of the open/close execution mode and the high-frequency support mode described later.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. To the input side of the MPU 62, the power failure monitoring board 67 and the payout controller 77 provided in the main controller 60 are connected. A power supply/launch control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 67, and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 67.

Various sensors such as the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As described above, each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a has the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special electricity detection sensor 45a, and the first working opening detection. The sensor 46a, the second operation port detection sensor 47a, the out port detection sensor 48a, and the gate detection sensor 49a are included. Based on the detection results of these ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not each ball has entered the ball. In the main CPU 63, various kinds of lottery are executed based on the winning of the first operating opening 33, and various kinds of drawing are executed based on the winning of the second operating opening 34.

On the input side of the MPU 62, a setting key insertion section 68a provided on the main control board 61, an update button 68b and a reset button 68c are provided. The setting key insertion portion 68a is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is arranged in the ON operation position or the OFF operation position. Then, the main CPU 63 identifies whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is arranged at the ON operation position or the OFF operation position based on the detection result from the sensor. The update button 68b is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the update button 68b is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the update button 68b is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor. The reset button 68c is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor.

A power failure monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a voice emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. In the payout control device 77, for example, a prize ball command is output based on the fact that a game ball has entered a prize ball-corresponding ball part in which the occurrence of a ball corresponds to the payout of a game ball in the ball entering part. It Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 81.

On the output side of the MPU 62, a special electric drive unit 32b that opens and closes the opening and closing door 32a of the special electric prize winning device 32, a general electric drive unit 34b that opens and closes the general electric officer 34a of the second operation port 34, and The drawing unit 37 and the universal drawing unit 38 are connected. By the way, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a and a special figure reservation display section 37b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the universal figure unit 38 is provided with a universal figure display section 38a and a universal figure hold display section 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the drive control of the drive unit 32b for special electricity is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the special electricity winning device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, when the general electric outlet object 34a is in the open state, the main CPU 63 executes drive control of the general electric outlet 34b so that the general electric outlet object 34a is opened and closed. Further, at the time of each game, the main CPU 63 executes the display control of the special figure display portion 37a. Further, in the case of clearly indicating the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a, the main CPU 63 executes the display control of the general figure display unit 38a. Further, when a prize is generated in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, or when the variable display is started on the special figure display unit 37a, the main CPU 63 controls the display of the special figure hold display unit 37b. When the winning is generated in the through gate 35, or when the variable display is started on the general figure display section 38a, the main CPU 63 executes the display control of the general figure hold display section 38b.

First to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Further, the management result of the game history in the management IC 66 is notified through the display on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Further, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the current set value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. In this case, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are controlled by the management IC 66 and not controlled by the main CPU 63, whereas the third notification display device 69c is controlled by the main CPU 63. The display is controlled and the display is controlled by the management IC 66. Regarding the display of the third notification display device 69c, the display control by the main CPU 63 has priority over the display control by the management IC 66.

However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the third notification display device 69c may have a configuration in which the display is controlled by the management IC 66 and not controlled by the main CPU 63. In this case, when the current setting value is displayed on the third annunciating display device 69c when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the main CPU 63 instructs the management IC 66 to display the setting value. Good.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d. The reading terminal 68d is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the connecting terminal of the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether the connection terminal of the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d based on the detection result from the sensor. When an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d, the management result of the game history in the management IC 66 or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 is output to the external device.

The power failure monitoring board 67 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 78, and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The power supply/launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, and the like are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power interruption is mainly used. Electric power for storage is supplied to the main RAM 65 of the control device 60 and the payout control device 77. Further, the power supply/launch control device 78 is responsible for the launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied. Further, the payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with the power switch as already described, and when the power switch is turned on, supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, and the power switch is turned off. As a result, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

The sound emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emission part 53 and the speaker part 54 provided on the front door frame 14 and controls the display control device 82 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. Is. The display control device 82 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the voice emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the main CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for the main CPU 63 to perform various lottery will be described with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 63 uses a variety of counter information at the time of the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of display of the special symbol display portion 37a, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the general symbol display portion 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery for winning, the jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are displaced. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when performing, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the hit random number counter C1, and display duration in the special figure display portion 37a and the symbol display device 41 are determined. The fluctuation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the universal electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the ordinary electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the universal electric open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0". Each counter is updated at short time intervals. The information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided as acquisition information storage means in the main side RAM 65 when a winning is generated in the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34. It is stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

The hold storage area 65a includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and the winning history of the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 is recorded. In addition, a combination of numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the winning in the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1→the second holding area RE1 Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the holding area RE2→the third holding area RE3→the fourth holding area RE4. Since the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 are provided in this way, the winning history of the game balls to the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. ..

Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, and may be another number such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical value information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display portion 37a, and starts one game time. At that time, a win/fail judgment or the like is performed on the basis of various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the general electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The general electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The ordinary electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and is stored in the ordinary electric current holding area 65c of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric outlet 34a to be in the open state based on the stored value of the general electric outlet opening counter C4.

In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric accessory 34a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with the situation where the game balls are continuously emitted in the same manner in the game area PA, the general electric service object 34a of the second working port 34 is opened per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the state becomes relatively high or low.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability that the ordinary electric open state wins in the ordinary electric open lottery using the ordinary electric accessory release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electric outlet 34a is in the open state when the general electric open state is won is set to a greater number than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time of one time is set longer. Has been done. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the general electric open state wins and the general electric auditors a thing 34a is opened a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum securing time required for the next regular electric train open lottery to be performed after one regular electric train open lottery (ie The one-time display duration on the display section 38a) is set to be short.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation opening 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operation port 33 is higher than in the second operation port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than the first operation port 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 increases. Then, when a winning is generated in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls that he or she holds. It can be carried out.

Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency of the high frequency support mode to be in the normal power open state per unit time more than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, in the normal power open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the ordinary electric open state. In addition, a securing time that is secured when the next ordinary electric train open lottery is performed after one ordinary electric train open lottery is performed (for example, it is executed in the universal map display portion 38a based on the winning of the through gate 35). In the configuration where multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter securing time is easier to select or the average securing time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Good. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the time of opening is lengthened, and the securing time that is secured when the next regular electric train opening lottery is performed after one regular electric train opening lottery is shortened. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or an arbitrary combination of conditions of shortening the averaging time and increasing the winning probability.

Here, as described above, the setting states of “setting 1” to “setting 6” exist in the pachinko machine 10, but which is the opening frequency and the opening mode of the general electric officer 34a in the low frequency support mode? The setting values are the same, and the opening frequency and the opening mode of the general electric auditors article 34a in the high frequency support mode are the same regardless of the setting values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the opening frequency and the opening mode of the general electric officer 34a varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in at least one of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode. It may be configured. For example, the higher the set value is, the higher the frequency of opening the general electric outlet 34a in the low frequency support mode may be, and the second operation in the case where the general electric outlet 34a is in the open state once in the low frequency support mode. The probability that the game ball enters the mouth 34 may be increased. Further, the higher the set value is, the higher the frequency of opening the general electric utility article 34a in the high frequency support mode may be. The second case when the general electric utility article 34a is in the open state once in the high frequency support mode may be adopted. It may be configured such that the probability of a game ball entering the actuation opening 34 increases.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and then returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 65a of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the main ROM 64 as a win/loss table. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM 64. As the win/loss table, low probability win/loss tables 64a to 64f for the low probability mode and a high accuracy win/loss table 64g for the high probability mode are stored.

The low probability hit/miss tables 64a to 64f are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6". That is, the low probability table 64a for setting 1 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1", and the setting referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". 2 low probability table 64b, the low probability table 64c for setting 3 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3", and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “Setting 5”, the low probability table 64d for setting 4 referred to when the pachinko machine 10 and the pachinko machine 10 are set. The low probability table 64f for the setting 6 referred to when the setting state of “setting 6” is “setting 6” exists.

These low certainty win/loss tables 64a to 64f are set so that the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of the jackpot result. Specifically, when the low-probability/probability table 64a for setting 1 is referenced, a big hit result is obtained at about 1/320, and when the low-probability/probability table 64b for setting 2 is referenced, about 1/310. Results in a big hit, and when the low probability table 64c for setting 3 is referenced, the result is about 1/300. When the low accuracy table 64d for setting 4 is referenced, the result is approximately 1/290. Results in a big hit, about 1/280 when the low probability table 64e for setting 5 is referred to, and about 1/270 when a low accuracy table 64f for setting 6 is referred to. The result is a big hit. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high setting value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the low-probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, the high-probability hit/miss table 64g is provided in only one kind so as to be common in any of the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6". The high-probability win/loss table 64g is set so that the winning probability of the jackpot result is higher than that of the low-probability win/loss tables 64a to 64f in any of the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6". Specifically, when the highly accurate hit/miss table 64g is referred to, the result is a big hit with about 1/30. As a result, it is possible to make the high-probability mode more advantageous than the low-probability mode regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, even in the lowest setting state "setting 1", the probability of a jackpot result can be made higher than in the low probability mode of "setting 6" which is the highest setting state by being in the high probability mode. Becomes Further, in the high-probability mode, it is possible to prevent an advantage or a disadvantage due to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, and to suppress the storage capacity for storing the high-probability hit/miss table 64g in the main ROM 64 in advance. It becomes possible.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29, and returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are (1) a mode of opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode, and (3) A plurality of jackpot results are set by differentiating the three conditions of the support mode in the universal electric accessory 34a of the 2 working port 34.

As a mode of the opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, the high frequency is set so that the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in either the high frequency winning mode or the low frequency winning mode, the round game is executed with the predetermined number of round games as the upper limit.

A round game is a game that continues until either one of the following conditions is satisfied: a predetermined upper limit duration elapses and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the special electric prize winning device 32. That is. Further, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same in the fixed round number regardless of the type of the jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, regardless of which jackpot result is obtained, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types are set for the one-time opening mode of the special electric prize winning device 32, with different open durations from the opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 to the closing. More specifically, a long time mode in which the open duration is set to 29 sec, which is a long time, and a short time mode in which the open duration is set to 0.06 sec, which is a short time shorter than the above long time, are set. Has been done.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the firing operation device 28 is being operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. To be done. Further, the upper limit number of end conditions of the round game is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode of the above-mentioned opening modes, the opening continuation time that is longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and one round game is set. On the other hand, in the short time mode, a time shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and one round game, more specifically, a release duration of a time shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball is set. Therefore, when the opening is performed once in the long time mode, it is expected that the special electric prize winning device 32 will be won by the upper limit number in one round game. It is expected that if the special opening award device 32 is opened twice, no prize is won in the special electric prize winning device 32, or even if a prize is won, only one prize is won.

In the high frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game in a long time mode. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

In addition, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened/closed in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are those of the high frequency winning mode. Is not limited to the above value as long as the frequency of winning the special electric prize winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher than that in the low frequency winning mode. Is.

The distribution destination of the jackpot result to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 64 as a distribution table 64h as shown in FIG. Then, in the distribution table 64h, a low-probability jackpot result, a low winning high-probability jackpot result, and a most advantageous jackpot result are set as the distribution destinations of the jackpot results when the jackpot result is obtained.

The low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/winning lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

The low winning high-accuracy jackpot result is the jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/loss lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. is there. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the win/loss lottery becomes a big hit state win, and the big hit state is brought about.

The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the win/loss lottery becomes a big hit state win, and the big hit state is brought about.

Note that the normal game state in relation to each of the above-mentioned game states means not the open/close execution mode but the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In addition, as a game result, a low winning high probability jackpot result may not be set. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode in the low winning high-probability jackpot result, the number of round games may be smaller than that in the low-probability jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result.

In the distribution table 64h, of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to the low-probability jackpot result, and "10 to 14" correspond to the low winning high-probability jackpot result. Corresponding, "15-29" corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot result.

Only one kind of distribution table 64h is provided so as to be common in any of the setting states of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. As a result, it is possible to prevent the distribution state of the jackpot result from being advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, and the storage capacity for storing the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64 in advance. Can be suppressed.

The distribution mode of the jackpot results may be different depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. For example, a higher setting value may be configured to increase the probability of being distributed to the most advantageous jackpot result, and a higher setting value may be configured to increase the probability of being distributed to the most advantageous jackpot result or the low winning affirmative jackpot result. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of becoming the high-probability mode after the jackpot result. In addition, the higher the set value, the lower the probability of being distributed to the high-accuracy jackpot result may be set to be low. It may be configured so that it can be distributed to the jackpot results. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode will occur.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Expected effects are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a kind of display effects in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in a game machine in which a final stop result is a given response result in a game time that is a predetermined jackpot result, the symbol display device 41 The display state for making the player think that the variation display state is likely to be the above-mentioned assignment correspondence result in the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol is started. In addition, as for the assignment correspondence result, specifically, a combination of symbols having the same number is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines.

Two types of expected display are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display or the result of the assignment response in the stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, the symbols are stopped and displayed for a part of the symbol columns displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, thereby displaying a combination of the reach symbols, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. A display state in which variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol column is included. Also, in the state where the reach symbol combination is displayed as described above, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, the reach effect is displayed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. , Which includes reducing or displaying a combination of reach patterns and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect.

In the notice display, after the variable display of the symbols is started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns, or some symbol columns are plural. In the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in the symbol column, the aspect in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol column is included. Further, a background screen having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes and a pattern on the symbol row having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes are also included. Such notice display can occur in both game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the reach display is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game time when the same symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed. Moreover, in the game times corresponding to the big hit result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, it is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the deviation result, when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. ..

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display the advance notice is made in the sound emission control device 81, not in the main control device 60. In this case, the voice emission control device 81 is more likely to give a notice display in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the miss result, and to give a notice display with a low appearance rate. The lottery process for displaying the advance notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that is likely to occur. By the way, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for game use is executed on the symbol display device 41.

Here, the probability that the reach display is generated in the game times that result in the deviation is the same in any of the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As a result, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage due to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from occurring with respect to the probability that the reach display is generated in the game times that result in the deviation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the reach display will occur in the game times that result in the deviation.

Next, the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the main CPU 63 determines the display duration time in the special figure display portion 37a and the display duration time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a timer interrupt process described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is executed. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of starting the variation display on the special figure display unit 37a and determining the variation pattern at the time when the symbol display device 41 starts the variation of the symbol.

<Regarding the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed by the main CPU 63 for advancing a game will be described. The processes of the main CPU 63 are roughly classified into a main process that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt process that is started regularly (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the main process is activated, and a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) elapses without waiting for the next process. During the execution period of the power-on wait process, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. After that, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102).

Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned on (step S103). When the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned on (step S103: NO), it is determined whether the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S104). When the reset button 68c is pressed (step S104: YES), each area of the main RAM 65 is set to "except for the area in the main RAM 65 in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. 0" is cleared (step S105). In other words, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while pressing the reset button 68c without turning on the setting key insertion portion 68a, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 for setting value information is started. The main RAM 65 is cleared while maintaining the state before the power supply was stopped. This makes it possible to initialize other areas of the main RAM 65 without the need to change the set value.

When the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step S104: NO), it is determined whether the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S106). The power failure flag is provided in the main side RAM 65, and when the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU 63 is stopped and a predetermined power failure time process is normally executed, the power failure flag is set to "1". Will be set. When the power failure flag is set to "1", it is determined whether or not the checksum calculation result matches the checksum saved when the power is cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S107). .. When the process of step S105 is executed, or when the positive determination is made in step S107, it is determined whether the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by checking the main RAM 65 (step S108). Specifically, it is determined to be normal when the setting value is any of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and abnormal when it is "0" or 7 or more.

When a negative determination is made in any of steps S106 to S108, the operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, an infinite loop is performed after executing the error notification process for notifying the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of the error (step S109). The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the all clear process (step S117) described later.

When a positive determination is made in all of steps S106 to S108, power-on setting processing is executed (step S110). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. After executing the process of step S110, the management IC 66 recognizes various information (step S111) and outputs various data to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62. A data output process is executed (step S112). Details of these recognition processing and data output processing will be described later.

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited at the stage when the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is released at the timing before the process of step S112 is completed and the process of step S113 is executed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process of step S112 ends, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process of step S113 is started. Therefore, the processing for advancing the game in the main CPU 63 is not started until this situation is reached.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps S113 to S116. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S113 to S116 is repeatedly executed using this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual process of steps S113 to S116 is an irregular process that is irregularly executed.

In the residual processing, first, in step S113, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In a succeeding step S114, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and a fluctuation counter updating process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed in step S115. In these update processes, the current numerical value information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 65, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical value information is performed, and then the process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S116, an interrupt permission setting for switching from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. When the process of step S116 is executed, the process returns to step S113 and the processes of steps S113 to S116 are repeated.

On the other hand, when the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on (step S103: YES), the main RAM 65 including the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. All areas are cleared to "0" (step S117). That is, when the operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, all the areas of the main RAM 65 are cleared to “0” even if the reset button 68c is not pressed. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and even if an operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, if the reset button 68c is not pressed, the entire RAM 65 on the main side is not operated. The clearing process may be executed without executing the clearing process and when the operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the reset button 68c is pressed.

After that, the set value update processing is executed in step S118, the set value update signal output processing is executed in step S119, and then the process proceeds to step S110. The setting value update process will be described below. The output processing of the set value update signal will be described later in detail. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the set value updating process.

First, "1" is set to the set value counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S201). The set value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which set value the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is. By setting "1" in the set value counter, when the set value updating process is executed, the set value becomes "set 1" regardless of the set value up to that point.

After that, display start processing of the set value is executed (step S202). In the setting value display start processing, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number "1" corresponding to "setting 1" is displayed. When changing the set value, the manager of the game hall can confirm the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by checking the third notification display device 69c.

Then, it is determined whether the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S204), on condition that the setting key insertion part 68a has not been operated OFF (step S203: NO). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. When a negative determination is made in step S204, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned off.

When the update button 68b is pressed once (step S204: YES), the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S205). When the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds 6 (step S206: YES), "1" is set in the set value counter (step S207). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, it is updated to the setting value one step higher, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", it is set to "setting 1". Will return.

When a negative determination is made in step S206, or when the processing of step S207 is executed, the display update processing of the set value is executed (step S208). In the display update process of the set value, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number corresponding to the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is displayed. By checking the third notification display device 69c, the manager of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

After executing the process of step S208, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned off. When the OFF operation has not been performed (step S203: NO), the processes of step S204 and thereafter are executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S203: YES), display end processing of the set value is executed (step S209). In the display end processing of the set value, the display of the set value on the third notification display device 69c is ended.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt processing is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds).

First, power failure information storage processing is executed (step S301). In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power cutoff is received from the power failure monitoring board 67, and when the occurrence of the power failure is identified, the infinite loop is executed after the power failure processing is executed. Become. In the power failure process, "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 65, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

After that, random number update processing for lottery is executed (step S302). In the lottery random number updating process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility article release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical value information is sequentially read from the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility article opening counter C4, and the read numerical value information is incremented by 1 respectively. After that, a process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S303, the random number initial value updating process is executed as in step S114, and at the same time, the fluctuation counter updating process is executed in step S304 as in step S115.

After that, the fraud detection process of monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as the fraudulent monitoring target has occurred is executed (step S305). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1". In a succeeding step S306, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. When a negative determination is made in step S306, the processing from step S307 is executed.

In step S307, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting to the various driving units 32b and 34b corresponding to the output information is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and the information for switching to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the general electric power is started to switch to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

Then, the reading process is executed (step S308). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

Then, a ball detection process is executed (step S309). In the entrance detection process, the signals received from the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the read results, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, and the first operating opening 33. The presence or absence of a ball entering the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 is specified. The details of the incoming ball detection process will be described later.

After that, a timer updating process for collectively updating the numerical value information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S310). In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical value information are aggregated and handled, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may be configured.

After that, a firing control process for controlling the firing of the game ball is executed (step S311). In the situation where the firing operation to the firing operating device 28 is continued, one gaming ball is fired at a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 sec. In a succeeding step S312, as input state monitoring processing, based on the information read in the reading processing in step S308, disconnection confirmation of each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed. I do.

After that, the special figure special electric power control processing for executing the game time execution control and the execution control of the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S313). The special figure special power control processing will be described in detail later.

After that, the general/universal/universal control process is executed (step S314). In the general/universal/universal control process, a process is executed to obtain the general/universal-side pending information when a prize has been paid to the through gate 35, and the general/universal-side pending information is stored. Then, the release information is determined to be released, and the processing for performing the effect for the general figure is executed when the release determination is triggered. Further, based on the result of the open determination, the process of opening and closing the universal utility article 34a of the second working port 34 is executed. In this case, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed, and if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed. Further, in the case of the open/close execution mode, even if the support mode immediately before that is the high frequency support mode, it becomes the low frequency support mode.

In the following step S315, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S313 and S314, the output information for reflecting the increased/decreased number of the hold information related to the special figure display section 37a in the special figure hold display section 37b is set and The output information for reflecting the increased/decreased number of the hold information related to the universal figure display section 38a on the universal figure hold display section 38b is set. Further, in step S315, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S313 and S314, output information for updating the display content of the special figure display portion 37a is set, and the display content of the general figure display portion 38a is changed. Set the output information for updating.

After that, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and the payout state receiving process for performing the process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S316). Further, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S317). Further, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S318). After that, the management output process for outputting the information corresponding to the entry result of the game ball in the game area PA to the management IC 66 is executed (step S319). Details of the management output process will be described later.

Next, the special figure special power control processing of step S313 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, a process of acquiring pending information is executed (step S401). In the process of obtaining the hold information, it is determined whether or not a prize has been paid to the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34, and if a winning has occurred, the number of holdings in the holding storage area 65a is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is less than the value (“4” in the present embodiment). When the number of reservations is less than the upper limit value, the number of reservations is incremented by 1, and each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S302 is used for holding. It is stored in the first holding area among the empty holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the area RE. In addition, when the winnings to the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34 occur at the same time, the processing for acquiring the holding information is performed within the range in which the processing for acquiring the holding information is executed once. Run multiple times. Further, when a new acquisition of the hold information is performed, a corresponding acquisition-time command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. When the voice emission control device 81 receives the command, it updates the display of the image showing the number of the hold information on the symbol display device 41 to the display content corresponding to the increase of the hold information.

After that, the information of the special figure special power counter provided in the main RAM 65 is read (step S402), and the special figure special power address table provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step S403). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the special map special telephone address is acquired from the special figure special telephone address table (step S404), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address among the processes of steps S406 to S412 (step S405). ). The special figure special telephone counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to know which of the various processes of steps S406 to S412 should be executed. The special figure special telephone address table is The start address of the program for executing the processing of steps S406 to S412 is set in association with the numerical information.

In step S406, special figure variation start processing is executed. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation start processing.

In the special figure variation start process, the data setting process is executed (step S502) on condition that the number of the hold information stored in the hold area RE is 1 or more (step S501: YES). In the data setting process, first, the number of holdings is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process of shifting the data stored in each of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 to the lower area side, and specifically, the second holding area RE2→the first holding area RE1. , The third reservation area RE3→the second reservation area RE2, the fourth reservation area RE4→the third reservation area RE3, and the like, and then the fourth reservation area RE4 is cleared to “0”. At this time, a shift command for recognizing that the data in the holding area has been shifted is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. When the voice emission control device 81 receives the command, it updates the display of the image showing the number of the hold information on the symbol display device 41 to the display content corresponding to the decrease of the hold information.

After executing the data setting process, the win/fail table is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). Specifically, the current winning/unwinning lottery mode is grasped by reading information indicating the winning/unwinning lottery mode in the main RAM 65. In the case of the high probability mode, the high probability table 64g is read from the main ROM 64. On the other hand, in the low probability mode, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is grasped by reading the value of the setting value counter of the main RAM 65. Then, the low probability table 64a to 64f corresponding to the grasped set value is read from the main ROM 64.

After that, the win/loss determination process is executed with reference to the win/loss tables 64a to 64g read in step S503 (step S504). In the hit determination processing, the hit determination information among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the numerical value information relating to the hit random number counter C1 is set as the jackpot numerical value information set in the hit tables 64a to 64g read in step S503. It is determined whether or not

When the result of the win/loss determination process is the jackpot win result (step S505: YES), the distribution determination process is executed (step S506). In the distribution determination process, information for distribution determination, that is, numerical value information related to the jackpot type counter C2, is read out from the information stored in the execution area AE. Then, by referring to the distribution table 64h provided in the main ROM 64, it is determined which jackpot result the numerical information related to the read jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to. Specifically, it specifies which of the low-probability jackpot result, the low winning high-probability jackpot result, and the most advantageous jackpot result corresponds to the jackpot result.

After that, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S507). Specifically, in the game time of the variation start of this time, the information of the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display portion 37a from the stop result table for the jackpot result prestored in the main ROM 64. It is specified and the specified information is written in the main RAM 65. In this big hit result stop result table, information on the form of the pattern stopped and displayed on the special figure display portion 37a is set differently for each kind of big hit result.

Then, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S508). Specifically, the main RAM 65 is provided with a flag corresponding to each kind of jackpot result, and in step S508, among the flags corresponding to each kind of jackpot result, the flag of the distribution determination process of step S506 is selected. "1" is set to the flag corresponding to the result.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S505 that the result is not the jackpot, the stop result setting process for the outlier result is executed (step S509). Specifically, in the game time of the variation start this time, the information of the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display portion 37a is stored in the main side ROM 64 in advance from the stop result table for the disconnection result. It is specified and the specified information is written in the main RAM 65. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

After performing the process of either step S508 or step S509, the process of grasping the duration of the game is performed (step S510). In this process, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated on the symbol display device 41 at the current game time. Specifically, when the game time related to the current fluctuation start is the low-probability jackpot result or the most advantageous jackpot result, it is determined that the reach display is generated. Further, if it is not any jackpot result and the numerical value information regarding the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical value information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach display is generated.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the reach generation continuation period table stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to, and the continuation period of the game time corresponding to the numerical value information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the continuation of the game times corresponding to the numerical value information of the variation type counter CS of this time is referred by referring to the reach non-occurrence duration table stored in the main ROM 64. Get the period. By the way, the duration of game times that can be obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of game times that can be obtained by referring to the reach occurrence duration table.

In addition, the duration of the game time when the reach is not generated is set so that the duration of the game time becomes shorter as the number of pieces of holding information stored in the holding area RE increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of hold information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode, a shorter duration of game times is selected. A reach non-occurrence duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the duration of the game times may not change in accordance with the number of pieces of hold information and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Further, the above configuration may be applied to the duration of the game times when the reach occurs. Further, the duration table may be set individually for each of the various jackpot results, the case of the missed reach, and the case of the missed result of the non-reach occurrence. In this case, the duration of the game times is distributed according to each game result.

After that, the information on the duration of the game times acquired in step S510 is set in the special figure special power timer counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S511). The updating of the numerical information set in the special figure special electric timer counter is executed in the timer updating process (step S310). By the way, as the effect for game play, the variable display of the symbol on the special figure display portion 37a and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 are performed. However, when each of these variable displays is finished, the game time is changed. In the state in which the stop result is displayed (a state in which the predetermined symbol combination is waiting on the activated line in the symbol display device 41), the final stop is displayed for the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec). In this case, the duration of the game time acquired in step S510 is the total time for one game time.

After that, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S512). The variation command includes information on the duration of the game. Here, as described above, the duration of the game times obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of the game times obtained by referring to the reach occurrence duration table. Even if the variation command does not include the information about the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, the voice emission control device 81 can identify the presence or absence of the reach occurrence from the information on the duration of the game. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. It should be noted that the variation command may include information that directly indicates whether or not the reach has occurred. Further, the type command includes information on the game result.

When the voice light emission control device 81 receives the variation command and the type command from the main CPU 63, the display light emission part 53, the speaker part 54, and the symbol display device 41 are caused to execute the game use effect. In this case, the effect for game play is performed in a mode corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command. Further, in the symbol display device 41, a variable display of symbols is performed as an effect for game use, and when the effect for game use is finished, a combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the win/loss determination process and the distribution determination process is displayed. It will be stopped.

After that, the variable display of the design on the special figure display portion 37a is started (step S513). Then, the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S514). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "0" when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1". After that, "1" is set to the eleventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S515). The eleventh output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that the game time has started is to be executed for the management IC 66.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 52 ), the special figure changing process is executed in step S407. In the special figure changing process, it is determined whether or not it is the timing before the final stop display during the duration of the game time, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the pattern in the special figure display portion 37a is ruled. Process for changing the target. At the time of the final stop display, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special map special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special figure changing process from the special figure changing process. Update to stuff. In this embodiment, the main CPU 63 does not send the final stop command to the sound emission control device 81.

In step S408, the processing for determining the special figure is executed. In the special figure finalizing process, the display mode of the design on the special figure display portion 37a is set to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game. In addition, in the special figure finalizing process, it is determined whether or not the final stop period has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not transition to the open/close execution mode occurs. When the shift to the open/close execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is cleared to "0". When a shift to the open/close execution mode occurs, the numerical information of the special map special electric counter is incremented by 1 to change the numerical information of the counter from that corresponding to the special figure finalizing process to that corresponding to the special electric start process. Update.

In step S409, special electric power start processing is executed. In the special electric power starting process, if the process for starting the opening period in the current open/close execution mode has not been executed yet, the opening period setting process is executed. Further, the opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 to execute the opening effect. When the opening period has elapsed, the starting process for starting the first round game is executed. In the starting process, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and the ending condition of the round game is set. In setting the ending condition, the upper limit duration time for keeping the special electric prize winning device 32 in the open state in the first round game of this time is set, and the special electric prize device 32 can be won in the first round game of this time. The upper limit number of game balls is set in the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 65.

In step S410, the special electric power releasing processing is executed. In the special electric open processing, it is determined whether or not the ending condition of the round game is satisfied. If the ending condition is satisfied, the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed. Then, if the round game that has ended this time is not the last round of the round game, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special map special electric power counter, the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special electric open processing If the round game ended this time is a round game of the last execution time, the numerical information of the special map special electric counter is added by 2 to correspond to the special electric open processing. Update from the one that corresponds to the special telephone end processing.

In step S411, a special electric power closing process is executed. In the special electric closed processing, it is determined whether or not the interval period between round games has passed. The interval period is set when the previous round game ends. When the interval period has elapsed, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and the ending condition of the round game is set. Then, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special electric power closing processing to the value corresponding to the special electric open processing.

In step S412, special electric power termination processing is executed. In the special power termination process, if the process for starting the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode this time is not yet executed, the ending period (for example, 5 sec) is set and the ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. By receiving the ending command, the voice emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 to execute the ending effect. When the ending period has elapsed, each of the winning/losing lottery mode and the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is set to a mode corresponding to the jackpot result which triggered the opening/closing execution mode of this time.

Next, in the main CPU 63, based on the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, the second working opening 34, and the through. A configuration for identifying whether or not a game ball has entered the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which the detection results of the ball entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a are input to the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can simultaneously handle eight types of signals. Areas in which information of "0" or "1" is stored according to the voltage of each signal are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7 are provided as the area. Further, although more than eight kinds of signals are input to the input port 63a, the signal group to be input to the input port 63a depends on the driver IC in order to limit the simultaneous input to eight kinds. It is switched through the switching control.

In the incoming ball detection process (step S309) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to the signal group from each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. In such a situation where the setting is made, the 0th bit D0 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning a prize detection sensor 44a is stored in the second bit D2, and the information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric power detection sensor 45a is stored in the third bit D3. , The fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a. The 6-bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a.

When the passage of the game ball is not detected, each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a outputs a LOW level signal as a detection signal indicating that the game ball is not being detected, and detects the passage of the game ball. In that case, a HI level signal indicating that the detection is being performed is output as the detection signal. The input port 63a stores "0" information for the corresponding bit when receiving the LOW level signal, and "1" for the corresponding bit when receiving the HI level signal. Stores the information of. That is, in a situation where passage of the game ball is not detected by the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored for the corresponding bit, and the passage of the game ball is detected. In the detected state, information of "1" corresponding to the information indicating that the bit is being detected is stored for the corresponding bit.

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the incoming ball detection process executed in step S309 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of “0” is stored in the 0th bit D0 is switched to the state in which the information of “1” is stored, the first winning hole detection sensor 42a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S601: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S602), and the value of the 10 award ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S603). .. The first output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag. The 10 prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that the payout of 10 game balls should be executed. When the value of the counter for 10 award balls is 1 or more, the 10 award ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the 10 award balls are issued. When the command is output once, the value of the counter for 10 prize balls is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the ten prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that ten game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the first bit D1 is switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S604: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S605), and the value of the 10 award ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S606). .. The second output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the second bit D2 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S607: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S608), and the value of the 10 award ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S609). .. The third output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the special-electricity detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S610: YES). In this case, the special electricity prize flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S611), and the fourth output flag provided to the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S612). The value of the counter for 15 prize balls provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S613). The special electric prize flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special electric prize device 32 in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode. In the special figure special electric power control processing (step S313) of the timer interruption processing (FIG. 11), by confirming that the special electric prize winning flag is set to "1", one game ball is inserted into the special electric prize winning device 32. It is specified that a ball has occurred, and the remaining possible number of balls to enter the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game is subtracted by one. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of possible balls to enter is executed, the special electric prize flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the special electric power detection sensor 45a should be executed to the management IC 66. .. The counter for 15 prize balls is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that the payout of 15 game balls should be executed. When the value of the counter for 15 prize balls is 1 or more, the 15 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the 15 prize balls are also displayed. When the command is output once, the value of the 15 award ball counter is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of “0” is stored in the fourth bit D4 is switched to the state in which the information of “1” is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S614: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S615), and the fifth output flag provided to the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S616). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S617). The first operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operating opening 33. In the special figure special electric power control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), it is confirmed that the first operation winning flag is set to “1”, and thus the result is stored in the holding area RE of the holding storage area 65a. On condition that the number of held information items is less than 4, which is the upper limit number, a process of newly storing the held information items is executed. In the special electric special electric power control processing (step S313), it is confirmed that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". To do. The fifth output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag. The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that one game ball should be paid out. When the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, the one prize ball command is output to the payout controller 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the one prize ball is also output. When the command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of “0” is stored in the fifth bit D5 is switched to the state in which the information of “1” is stored, the second working port detection sensor 47a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S618: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S619), and "1" is set to the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S620). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S621). The second operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the second operating port 34. In the special figure special electric power control process (step S313) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 11), it is confirmed that the second operation winning flag is set to “1”, and thus the result is stored in the holding area RE of the holding storage area 65a. On condition that the number of held information items is less than 4, which is the upper limit number, a process of newly storing the held information items is executed. In the special electric special electric power control processing (step S313), it is confirmed that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0". To do. The sixth output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the second working opening detection sensor 47a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the sixth bit D6 is switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a. Is detected (step S622: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S623). The seventh output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be executed for the management IC 66. is there.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the seventh bit D7 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S624: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S625). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the universal communication control processing (step S314) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), it is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to "1", and the universal communication stored in the universal communication holding area 65c is confirmed. A process of storing the numerical information of the current general electric utility article release counter C4 in the general electric power holding area 65c as the general-purpose-side holding information, provided that the number of pieces of the holding information on the side is less than the upper limit number of 4. To execute. It is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to "1" in the normal/universal control process (step S314), and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated in the 4 msec cycle as already described, when the detection of one game ball is started by the one ball detection sensor 42a to 49a, the ball In the situation where the detection sensor 42a to 49a continues to detect the one game ball, the main CPU 63 specifies that the game ball detection sensor 42a to 49a has detected one game ball. Done. Therefore, it suffices if each one of the first to seventh output flags is provided.

Next, the content of processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configurations of the payout control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 16.

The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 includes a payout side CPU 92, which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit, as well as a payout side ROM 93, a payout side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The payout-side ROM 93 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage (that is, non-volatile storage means), and is used as a read-only memory. The payout side ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the payout side CPU 92 and fixed value data.

The payout side RAM 94 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) such as an SRAM and a DRAM that needs to be supplied with electric power from the outside to retain the storage, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 is capable of random access and has a shorter read time than the payout side ROM 93 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data and the like for execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93.

The payout side CPU 92 can perform bidirectional communication with the main side CPU 63. Upon receipt of the prize ball command from the main CPU 63, the payout side CPU 92 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. Further, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the payout of the game balls can be normally performed, and when it is determined that the payout of the game balls is not normally possible, the payout side RAM 94 is displayed. The payout device 76 is stopped even in the situation where the number of unpaid prize balls is stored. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits to the main side CPU 63 a payout restriction command indicating that the normal payout is not possible. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 perform a notification indicating that it is not possible to normally pay out the game balls. As described above, the notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. As a state in which it is not possible to normally pay out the game balls, the lower plate 56a is filled with the game balls, the tank 75 has no balls filled with the game balls, and the payout device 76. Is not operating normally, there is a payout abnormal state, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13. ..

An unillustrated full tank detection sensor is provided at an intermediate position of the game ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming ball is in a full state when the gaming ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and the state in which the gaming ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is released. In this case, it is specified that the full tank state has been released.

A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided at an intermediate position of the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that there is no ball when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor, and when the state where the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball no detection sensor is released. Specify that the ball-free state has been released.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the game balls paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. Further, the payout side CPU 92 specifies that the payout detection sensor is in the payout abnormal state when the payout detection sensor does not continuously detect the game ball despite the drive control of the payout device 76 so that the game ball is paid out. , When the state in which the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is released, it is specified that the abnormal payout state has been released.

A front door opening sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits a close detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. In the case of, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and when receiving the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. The front door frame 14 is specified to be in the open state. Further, the payout-side CPU 92 transmits a front door opening command to the main CPU 63 at the timing specified that the front door frame 14 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when receiving the front door opening command, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closing state when receiving the front door closing command.

A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2 ), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body opening sensor 96 sends an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and determines when the opening detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96. It specifies that the main body 12 is in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a main body opening command to the main CPU 63 at a timing specified that the gaming machine main body 12 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is changed from the open state to the closed state. A main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at a timing. The main CPU 63 identifies that the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state when receiving the body opening command, and identifies that the gaming machine body 12 is in the closing state when receiving the body closing command.

The timer interrupt process executed by the payout CPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

First, a full tank process is executed (step S701). In the process for full tank, as described above, it is determined whether or not the tank is in the full tank state based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor, and in the case of the full tank state, the process for stopping the payout of the game balls. And the command indicating that the tank is full is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the full tank state is released, processing for enabling the payout of gaming balls is executed, and at the same time, a command indicating that the full tank state has been released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the ball non-use process is executed (step S702). In the ball non-use process, as described above, it is determined whether or not there is no ball based on the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor, and in the case of no ball, the process for stopping the payout of the game ball is performed. Along with the execution, a command indicating that there is no ball is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the non-sphere state is released, processing for enabling payout of the game ball is executed, and a command indicating that the non-sphere state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the payout abnormality monitoring processing is executed (step S703). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the payout state is abnormal based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and when the payout state is abnormal, the process of stopping the payout of the game ball is executed. At the same time, a command indicating that the dispensing is abnormal is sent to the main CPU 63. Also, when the payout abnormal state is canceled, processing for enabling the payout of gaming balls is executed, and a command indicating that the payout abnormal state has been canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

Then, the front door opening monitoring process is executed (step S704). In the front door opening monitoring process, as described above, it is specified whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95, and when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, While executing the process of stopping the payout of the game balls, it sends a front door opening command to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the front door frame 14 is closed, processing for enabling payout of game balls is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

Then, the main body opening monitoring process is executed (step S705). In the main body opening monitoring process, as described above, based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96, it is specified whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the game ball The process of stopping the payout of the main body is executed and the main body opening command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, processing for enabling the payout of gaming balls is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the command reading process is executed (step S706). In the command reading process, a process of reading the prize ball command transmitted by the main CPU 63 is executed, and the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. Then, after executing the prize ball setting process for adding the number of the received prize ball commands to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S707), the payout device 76 pays out the game balls. The payout control process for controlling the execution of is executed (step S708). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 has a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled, and the payout detection sensor detects one game ball. In this case, 1 is subtracted from the value of the prize ball number information. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes "0", the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. After that, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S709).

Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal plate 97. The external terminal board 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals. Some external terminals are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and some external terminals are provided. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. Since the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 are electrically connected to the external terminal board 97 in this way, as shown in FIG. It is possible to output.

One external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the front door opening sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the main body opening sensor 96. In detail regarding the configuration of this electrical connection, a signal relay board 98 is provided at an intermediate position of a signal path from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branching from the signal path SL1 from the front door opening sensor 95 toward the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to the external terminal for opening the front door of the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door of the external terminal board 97. As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without the control of the payout side CPU 92.

For details of the main body opening sensor 96, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branching path SL4 branched from the signal path SL3 directed from the main body opening sensor 96 to the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to the external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal board 97. As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without the control of the payout side CPU 92.

Next, the contents of information externally output to the hall computer HC from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 will be described. First, the content of information output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

In the external information setting process (step S318) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), the main CPU 63 sets output of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 in the external terminal board 97. As information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, information indicating that the support mode is in the high-frequency support mode, and one game time have ended. And a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls from the game area PA through any one of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. Information indicating that the game ball has been discharged, information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and information that indicates that the game ball has entered the second operating port 34 are included. ..

In the external information setting process (step S709) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17), the payout side CPU 92 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 in the external terminal board 97. The information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that 10 gaming balls have been paid out.

In the hall computer HC, according to various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of paying out the game balls in the pachinko machine 10 or the like. For example,
・The payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of payouts of the game balls generated until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine ・The output in the normal game state that is not the opening/closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode Ball rate (hereinafter, this ball output rate is referred to as "B")
-Ball output rate in open/close execution mode-ball output rate in high frequency support mode-number of game times executed until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is "S")
B-S x "the number of prize balls for winning in the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34"
-The number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 that occur until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
-The number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 that have occurred until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S2")
B-(S1 x "number of prize balls for winning in first working port 33" + S2 x "number of prize balls for winning in second working port 34")
The probability of occurrence of the open/close execution mode per unit game time, the probability of occurrence of high frequency support mode per unit game time, etc. are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding ball input section.

<Structure for managing game ball winning mode>
Next, a configuration for managing the game history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As described above, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes the main CPU 63, the main ROM 64, the main RAM 65, and the management IC 66. Further, the MPU 62 is provided with the I/F 101 in addition to these, and is provided with the reading terminal 68d already described.

The I/F 101 is an interface for transmitting/receiving a signal to/from a device external to the MPU 62. The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. The detection result from the sensors such as the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a and the command from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I/F 101, and based on the input detection result and the content of the command. As described above, the main CPU 63 executes various processes. Further, when a signal is output to a device such as the drive unit 32b for special electric power as a result of execution of various processes in the main CPU 63, the signal is output through the output port of the I/F 101, and When a command is output to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81 as a result of the CPU 63 performing various processes, the command output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101.

The management IC 66 includes a management-side I/F 111, a management-side CPU 112, a management-side ROM 113, a management-side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, a history memory 117, and a calculation result memory 131. Equipped with. These respective devices are connected to each other through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication.

The management-side I/F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via the signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and the signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. It is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 68d via the. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management I/F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 68d are output from the output port of the management I/F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d via the bidirectional communication signal path group 120 built in the MPU 62.

The management side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management-side ROM 113 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage (that is, nonvolatile storage means), and is used as a read-only memory. The management-side ROM 113 stores various control programs executed by the management-side CPU 112 and fixed value data. The management-side RAM 114 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) such as an SRAM and a DRAM that needs to be supplied with electric power from the outside to retain the storage, and is used for both reading and writing. The management-side RAM 114 is capable of random access and has a shorter read time than the management-side ROM 113 when compared with the same data capacity. The management-side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data and the like for execution of the control program stored in the management-side ROM 113.

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock that constantly measures date information and time information, and outputs the measured date information and time information (hereinafter, also referred to as date and time information) according to an instruction from the management CPU 112. This is a possible configuration. The RTC 115 is provided with a backup power supply, and it is possible to measure the date information and the time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

The correspondence relationship memory 116 is a memory such as an SRAM and a DRAM that requires external power supply to retain the memory (that is, a volatile storage unit), and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence relationship memory 116 stores information on the correspondence relationship between the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p. Used for. Details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

The history memory 117 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage (that is, nonvolatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding the game history received from the main CPU 63 through the management I/F 111. Details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be described later.

The operation result memory 131 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage (that is, non-volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The calculation result memory 131 is used to sequentially store various parameters calculated by the management-side CPU 112 using the history information stored in the history memory 117. The contents of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and are output to the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d.

Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management-side I/F 111 will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111.

The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through the signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p is an input target signal. Information of "0" is stored as the first data when is at the LOW level, and information of "1" is stored as the second data when the signal to be input is at the HI level. The relationship between the LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

The first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU63 outputs the first signal of the LOW level in the situation where a new game ball is not detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and one game is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level first signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level first signal is input to the first buffer 122a.

The second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the second signal of the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and one game is played by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level second signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level second signal is input to the second buffer 122b.

The third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a low-level third signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, and one game is played by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level third signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level third signal is input to the third buffer 122c.

The fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric power detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, when the main CPU 63 outputs a low-level fourth signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. And outputs a fourth signal of HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fourth signal is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

The fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal in a situation where a new gaming ball is not detected by the first working opening detection sensor 46a, and one game is played by the first working opening detection sensor 46a. When a sphere is detected, the HI level fifth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the fifth signal of the HI level is input to the fifth buffer 122e.

The sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level sixth signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the second working opening detection sensor 47a, and one game is played by the second working opening detection sensor 47a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level sixth signal is output for a specific period. The specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level sixth signal is input to the sixth buffer 122f.

The seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level seventh signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the out-mouth detecting sensor 48a, and one game ball is detected by the out-mouth detecting sensor 48a. In that case, the seventh signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level seventh signal is input to the seventh buffer 122g.

An eighth signal corresponding to whether the open/close execution mode is in operation is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW-level eighth signal in the situation other than the open/close execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level eighth signal in the situation of the open/close execution mode.

A ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in operation is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW-level ninth signal in the situation not in the high-frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the HI-level ninth signal in the situation in the high-frequency support mode.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and continues the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. And output.

The eleventh signal corresponding to whether or not the game time has started is input to the eleventh buffer 122k. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level eleventh signal before the game time is started, and outputs the HI level eleventh signal for a specific period when the game time is started. To do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level eleventh signal is input to the eleventh buffer 122k.

A set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize that the main CPU 63 has newly set the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, when the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level set value update signal in a situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not newly set, and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. In addition, the HI level set value update signal is output for the number of pulse signals corresponding to the newly set set value for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

The sixteenth buffer 122p has an output instruction signal for causing the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the trigger for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d. Is entered. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal in a situation where it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. To do. The specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

Although the twelfth buffer 122l, the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the fourteenth buffer 122n can input signals from the main CPU 63, the pachinko machine 10 is blank in which normal signals are not input. In this way, as the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111, the number of buffers 122a to 122p, which are larger than the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10, are provided. It is possible to use the management IC 66 for a model different from the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the signal paths 118l to 118n may not be formed between the buffers 122l to 122n to be blanked.

Whether the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p are decided at the design stage of the management IC 66, and an instruction from the main CPU 63 is received. Instead, the management-side CPU 112 can specify that the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the kind of these signals is instructed by the main CPU 63. As a result, the CPU 112 on the management side specifies. Although the details of the types of these signals in the management-side CPU 112 will be described later, when the control is started in the main-side CPU 63 and the management-side CPU 112 with the start of the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62, the main-side CPU 63 causes the management-side CPU 112 to perform control. It is performed by transmitting a type identification command to the. In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the types of various signals are specified by the management side CPU 112 in the situation where operating power is supplied, The information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referred to.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. In the correspondence memory 116, the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111. It is provided.

In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a. Further, in the first correspondence area 123a, together with information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31, also information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 (10 pieces) Is stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the second buffer 122b. Further, in the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 and information (10 pieces) on the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 are also provided. Is stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, together with the information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31, information (10 pieces) of the number of gaming balls paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 Is stored.

In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating the special electric prize winning device 32 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the fourth buffer 122d. In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating that it is the special electric prize winning device 32 and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32 (15 pieces) Is stored. In the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating the first operating port 33 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. Further, in the fifth correspondence area 123e, together with information indicating that it is the first operation port 33, information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first operation port 33 (1 ) Is also stored. Information indicating the second operating port 34 is stored in the sixth correspondence area 123f as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f. Further, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, together with information indicating that it is the second operation port 34, information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the second operation port 34 (1 ) Is also stored. Information indicating the outlet 24a is stored in the seventh correspondence area 123g as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

Information indicating the open/close execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. In the ninth correspondence area 123i, information indicating the high frequency support mode is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. In the tenth correspondence area 123j, information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j. In the eleventh correspondence area 123k, as the information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k, information indicating that the game time is started is stored.

In the twelfth correspondence area 123l, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l by the management side CPU 112, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any is stored. In the thirteenth correspondence area 123m, as the information for specifying the type of the signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m by the management side CPU 112, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any is stored. In the fourteenth correspondence area 123n, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n by the management-side CPU 112, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any is stored.

As described above, what kind of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is specified by the management-side CPU 112 by receiving an instruction from the main-side CPU 63. The management IC 66 can be used for a model different from the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66.

Also, instead of outputting the information for recognizing the type of the signal each time the signal corresponding to the storage of the history information is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n, the type of the signal is recognized in advance. And the information for specifying the type of the signal input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n on the management side CPU 112 based on the output information is stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116. It is a configuration. As a result, compared with the configuration in which the information for recognizing the type of the signal is output each time the signal output corresponding to the storage of the history information is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n, It is possible to reduce the amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112.

In addition, the output of information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n by the management-side CPU 112 is performed at the start of supply of operating power. Thereby, in the situation where the game is started in the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible for the management side CPU 112 to specify the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n.

Further, information setting that the setting value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p are performed in the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, the 15th buffer 122o and the 16th buffer 122p regarding the set value update signal and the output instruction signal that are surely used not only by the pachinko machine 10 but also by other types of pachinko machines that use the management IC 66. It is possible to omit the processing for specifying the type of signal input to the. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the processing for specifying the type of the signal.

Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be described. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are sequentially set, and a history information storage area 125 is set so as to correspond to each pointer information one-to-one. The history information storage area 125 can store a combination of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and an area for storing correspondence information. A data capacity of 1 byte is assigned. When it is necessary to store the correspondence information in accordance with the signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n (actually, the first to eleventh buffers 122a to 122k in the case of the pachinko machine 10) First, the date and time information measured by the current RTC 115 is stored in the area for storing the RTC information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information which is the current writing target. After that, the correspondence relationship information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n that triggered the information storage this time is read from the correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n in the correspondence relationship memory 116, and the read correspondence relationship information. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information which is the current writing target.

Regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, specifically, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g are input with the signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a as described above. Therefore, the information corresponding to the types of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116. More specifically, the information corresponding to the type of the ball entering portion corresponding to each of the ball detecting sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a are all for detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 31, so these first to third winning openings are provided. Information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored in each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a. Further, information indicating that it is the special electricity winning device 32 is stored in the fourth correspondence area 123d, and information indicating that it is the first operation port 33 is stored in the fifth correspondence area 123e. The sixth correspondence relationship area 123f stores information indicating the second operation port 34, and the seventh correspondence relationship area 123g stores information indicating the outlet port 24a. When the buffers 122a to 122n that have triggered the information storage this time are any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of the ball entering portion corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is the first to the first. It is read from any of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the read information on the type of the ball entering portion is stored as it is in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125.

On the other hand, a signal indicating whether the eighth buffer 122h is in the open/close execution mode is input, a signal indicating whether the ninth buffer 122i is in the high frequency support mode is input, and the tenth buffer 122j is A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is input, and a signal indicating whether or not the game time has started is input to the eleventh buffer 122k. Accordingly, the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating the open/close execution mode, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information indicating the high-frequency support mode, and the tenth correspondence area 123h. Information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j, and information indicating that it is a game time is stored in the eleventh correspondence area 123k.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level eighth signal in the situation where the open/close execution mode is not set, and continuously outputs the HI level eighth signal in the situation where the open/close execution mode is set. The side CPU 112 identifies that the opening/closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and identifies that the opening/closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It becomes possible. Then, regardless of whether the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level or when the HI level changes to the LOW level, the management-side CPU 112 generates a trigger to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify as done. That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the open/close execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the start information is stored together with the history information storage area 125. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of. When the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the open/close execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h, but also the end information, together with the history information storage area 125. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW-level ninth signal in the situation not in the high-frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the HI-level ninth signal in the situation in the high-frequency support mode. The managing CPU 112 identifies that the high-frequency support mode is started when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and ends the high-frequency support mode when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It is possible to specify that it has been done. Then, regardless of whether the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level or when the HI level changes to the LOW level, the management-side CPU 112 generates a trigger to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify as done. That is, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i, but also the start information is stored in the history information storage area. It is stored in the area for storing 125 correspondence information. Further, when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information is recorded in the history information storage area. It is stored in the area for storing 125 correspondence information.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and outputs the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Since the continuous output is performed, the management-side CPU 112 specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It is possible to specify that the front door frame 14 is closed. Then, regardless of whether the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level or when the HI level changes to the LOW level, the management-side CPU 112 causes the history information storage area 125 to store the correspondence information. Identify as done. That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information is stored together with the history information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the area 125. Further, when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information is stored together with the history information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the area 125.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level eleventh signal until the game time start timing, and when the game time start timing is reached, the HI level eleventh signal is output for a specific period. Output a signal. Therefore, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the game time has started when the eleventh signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level. That is, when the eleventh signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the information indicating the game time read from the eleventh correspondence relation area 123k is stored as the correspondence relation information in the history information storage area 125. Store in the area.

The history information storage area 125 can store all history information generated during the 10 consecutive business days in which the game balls are continuously emitted from the pachinko machine 10 from opening to closing. It is provided for a few minutes. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times a day, 600,000 or more history information storage areas 125 are provided. As a result, all history information can be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the pointer information that is the current write target in the history memory 117. Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, information for designating the pointer information “0” as the writing target is set in the pointer area 126. Then, each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. When the pointer information of the last order is the write target and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information of the last order, the pointer information of "0" is set as the write target. The information in the usage area 126 is updated. As a result, when a history information storage trigger occurs that exceeds the number of history information items that can be stored, new history information is overwritten in order from the history information storage area 125 in which old history information is stored. Become.

Further, when the history information is read from the history memory 117 by the external device, all the history information storage area 125 is cleared to “0”, and the pointer information of “0” becomes the writing target. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the history information that was once read from becoming read again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the game history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the recognition process executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9).

First, "14" is set in the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S801). The output counter for recognition recognizes which type of signals the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 correspond to, and outputs the remaining information output to the management-side CPU 112. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the required number of times. As already described, 14 of the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are targets of signal type recognition, so "14" is set in the recognition output counter.

Then, the output process of the identification start command is executed (step S802). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n correspond to. When outputting this command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. That is, using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management-side CPU 112 to store history information, the first to fourteenth buffers 122a are used. Command output is performed to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal corresponds to 122n. This reduces the number of signal paths as compared with a configuration in which a signal path for performing the command output is provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. It becomes possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output process of the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification start command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification start command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. Has been done. Upon receiving the identification start command, the management-side CPU 112 should start the process for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

Then, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S803). In this case, the first buffer 122a corresponds to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n so that the signal type setting target is first and then the (n+1)th buffer is the signal type setting target after the nth buffer. The recognition setting of the signal type to be performed is performed. Therefore, if the recognition output counter is "14" to "12", the type identification command indicating the general winning opening 31 and the number of prize balls is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "11", the special prize winning The type identification command indicating the device 32 and the number of prize balls is read, and if the recognition output counter is "10", the type identification command indicating the first operation port 33 and the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is "9", it means that it is the second operating port 34 and that the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read out. If the recognition output counter is "8", it means that it is the outlet 24a. The type identification command shown is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "7", the type identification command indicating the open/close execution mode is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "6", it is the high frequency support mode. Is read, and if the output counter for recognition is "5", the type identification command for front door frame 14 is read, and if the output counter for recognition is "4", it is a game game. Is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "3" to "1", the type identification command indicating blank is read out.

Then, the output process of the read type identification command is executed (step S804). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity similarly to the identification start command, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output processing of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started so that the management side CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification type command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the ninth signal. Has been done. By receiving the identification type command, the management-side CPU 112 responds to the identification type command to the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffers to be set this time among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n. Information to be stored.

After that, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S805), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement is 1 is "0" (step S806). When the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S806: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtraction of 1 is executed (step S803 and Step S804).

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S806: YES), the output process of the identification end command is executed (step S807). The identification end command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output processing of the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification end command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification end command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. Has been done. Upon receiving the identification end command, the management-side CPU 112 identifies that the processing for storing the information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the signal type in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is completed. To do.

Next, the management processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is started. The processing speed of the management CPU 112 is higher than that of the main CPU 63, and the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is started after the main CPU 63 starts one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11). By the time the process starts, the combination of the processes from step S908 onward in the management process is executed 16 times or more.

First, it is determined whether an identification start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S901). If the identification start command has not been received (step S901: NO), the setting update recognition process is executed (step S902), and the process returns to step S901. Although details will be described later, in the setting update recognition process, when the main CPU 63 newly sets the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the corresponding process is executed.

When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S901: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S903). The setting target counter is a counter for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of the buffer 122a to 122n for which the signal type is set. The first buffer 122a is the target for setting the signal type first, and then the n+1th buffer is the target for setting the signal type after the nth buffer.

After that, on condition that the type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), the correspondence relationship setting process is executed (step S905). In the correspondence relation setting process, of the first to fourteenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123n of the correspondence relation memory 116, the type identification received this time is recorded in the correspondence relation area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management RAM 114. Stores the signal type information set in the command. Then, the value of the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S906).

If a negative determination is made in step S904, or if the processing of step S906 is executed, it is determined whether or not an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S907). If the identification end command has not been received (step S907: NO), the process returns to step S904, and on condition that the type identification command is newly received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), steps S905 and S906 are executed. Execute the process again.

When the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S907: YES), the processes of steps S908 to S910 are repeatedly executed. Although details will be described later, in step S908, history setting processing for storing history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117 is executed. Although details will be described later, in step S909, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the calculation results are notified by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Display output processing for executing. In step S910, an external output process for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the operation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d, which will be described in detail later, is executed.

FIG. 24 is a time chart showing a state in which information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122n is stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116. 24A shows a period during which a command is output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h), and FIG. FIG. 24B shows a period in which the output state of the ninth signal is at the HI level, and FIG. 24C shows the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122n. 24D shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed, and FIG. 24D shows the timing at which the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process (step S905).

When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. It Further, at the timing of t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. After that, at the timing of t2 in which the output of the identification start command is continued, as shown in FIG. 24B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level. The management-side CPU 112 confirms that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, thereby specifying that the command has been transmitted from the main-side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. The contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped by confirming the information of. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management-side CPU 112 enters the identification state by making a positive determination in step S901 of the management process (FIG. 23). Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 24A, the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started. Further, at the timing of t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. After that, at the timing of t5, which is the situation where the type identification command is continuously output, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management-side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been transmitted from the main-side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first-eighth buffers 122a to 122h By confirming the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 is grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management-side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. In the correspondence relation setting process, information indicating the general winning opening 31 and information on the number of prize balls are stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. After that, at the timing of t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG.

After that, in each of the timing of t7 to the timing of t9, the timing of t10 to the timing of t12, the timing of t13 to the timing of t15, and the timing of t16 to the timing of t18, similarly to the timing of t4 to the timing of t6, The management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence relationship setting process corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the 14th type identification command is completed from timing t16 to timing t18.

After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 24A, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started. Further, at the timing of t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. After that, at the timing of t20 in which the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 24(b). The management-side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been transmitted from the main-side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first-eighth buffers 122a to 122h By confirming the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 is grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management-side CPU 112 ends at the timing of t20 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG.

In order to instruct the management-side CPU 112 to store history information, the management-side CPU 112 is configured to recognize whether or not the command is output using the ninth signal as described above. Even if the command is output using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) used, it is clear to the management side CPU 112 that the command is being output. It becomes possible to recognize.

Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63. The management output process is executed in step S319 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, "11" is set in the managed counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1001). The management target counter specifies, by the main CPU 63, whether or not there is a management target that is not a target for specifying whether or not the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed in this management output process. At the same time, it is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which management target should change the signal output state to the management CPU 112. In the one-time management output process, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed. There are a total of 11 whether the open/close execution mode is executed, the high-frequency support mode is executed, the front door frame 14 is opened/closed, and the game time is started. Therefore, first, "11" is set in the managed counter.

Then, it is determined whether the output state of the signal to the management-side CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the current value of the management target counter is the HI level (step S1002). When it is not the HI level (step S1002: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the managed counter is 5 or more, so that the entry detection sensors 42a having seven managed objects corresponding to the value of the managed counter are detected. To 48a are specified (step S1003).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether or not the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S1004). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is “11” and corresponds to the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the first output flag, When the value of the managed counter is “10” and corresponds to the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the second output flag, and the value of the managed counter is determined. Is "9" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the third output flag, and the value of the managed counter is "8". If it corresponds to the special electric power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the fourth output flag, and the value of the managed counter is "7", and the first working opening detection sensor 46a. If it corresponds to, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the fifth output flag, the value of the managed counter is "6", and it corresponds to the second working port detection sensor 47a. In this case, it is determined whether or not the sixth output flag is set to "1", and when the value of the managed counter is "5" and it corresponds to the outlet 24a, the seventh output flag is set to " It is determined whether "1" is set. As described above, the first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball detection process (FIG. 15).

When "1" is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter (step S1004: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals is set to the HI level. Is set (step S1005). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S1006).

When a negative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether a trigger for switching the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the HI level has occurred (step S1007). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "4", it is determined whether or not the transition to the open/close execution mode has occurred, and when the value of the managed counter is "3", it is high. It is determined whether or not the transition to the frequency support mode has occurred, and when the value of the managed counter is “2”, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state, and the managed counter When the value is "1", it is determined whether the game time is started by determining whether "1" is set in the eleventh output flag. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1007, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the HI level (step S1008). If the process of step S1008 is executed when the value of the managed counter is "1", the eleventh output flag is cleared to "0".

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined whether or not a trigger for switching the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1009). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is 5 or more or "1" and the current management target is any of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a or the start of the game time, the first to seventh signals Then, it is determined whether or not the HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter in the eleventh signal was switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S908) of the management process (FIG. 23) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level It is a period during which the state can be reliably specified by the management CPU 112. When the value of the managed counter is “4” and the current managed object is the open/close execution mode, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode has ended, and the value of the managed counter is “3”. When the current management target is the high-frequency support mode, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode has ended, the value of the management target counter is “2”, and the current management target is the front door frame 14. In this case, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is closed. When the opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1009: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the LOW level ( Step S1010).

If a negative determination is made in step S1004, the processing of step S1006 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S1007, the processing of step S1008 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S1009, or When the process of S1010 is executed, the value of the managed counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the managed counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1012). When the value of the management target counter is 1 or more (step S1012: NO), the process from step S1002 is executed on the management target corresponding to the new management target counter value.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management-side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S908 of the management process (FIG. 23).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed in the management CPU 112 of the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in the confirmation counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S1101). Specifically, of the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than the information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the identification is performed. The information of the number that was set is set in the check target counter. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 stores information other than the information indicating that it is blank in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k, so that in step S1101, the check target counter is set to "11". To do.

Then, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1102). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122n are the check targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh buffer 122k is the check target of the numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer 122e is the check target of the numerical information. ..

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, the RTC information that is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S1103). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1104). In the writing process, the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is referred to identify the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information of the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S1103 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. If the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating the open/close execution mode, the information indicating the high frequency support mode, and the information indicating the front door frame 14, Not only the correspondence information but also the start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, when the value of the check target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123n is a target for reading correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh correspondence relationship area 123k is the target for reading the correspondence relationship information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence relationship area 123e is the correspondence relationship. It is a target for reading information.

By performing the writing process as described above, the value of the confirmation target counter is any one of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the game times. In the case of, the RTC information, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second opening are stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. A combination of the corresponding information indicating that the operation port 34 is one of the game times is stored as history information. When the value of the check target counter is one of the open/close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. The combination of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the correspondence information indicating any one of the front door frames 14 and the start information is stored as history information.

Then, the update process of the target pointer is executed (step S1105). In the update processing, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

If a negative determination is made in step S1102, or if the processing of step S1105 is executed, it is determined whether or not the signal output is switched to the LOW level in the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter. It is determined whether or not the correspondence information to be confirmed is stored (step S1106). Specifically, when the current value of the check target counter is “8” to “10”, the corresponding correspondence areas 123h to 123j have the information indicating the open/close execution mode and the high frequency support mode. Since either the information indicating that there is the information or the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored, a positive determination is made in step S1106.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1106, the numerical value information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is changed from "1" to "0". By checking whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S1107). If an affirmative decision is made in step S1107, the RTC information is read out (step S1108), as in step S1103, and writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1109). In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S1108 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, not only the correspondence information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, when the value of the check target counter is one of the open/close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the pointer information corresponding to the write target is dealt with. In the history information storage area 125, a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating any one of the opening/closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and the end information is stored as history information. It will be in the state of being. After that, similar to step S1105, the target pointer update processing is executed (step S1110).

If a negative determination is made in step S1106, a negative determination is made in step S1107, or if the process of step S1110 is executed, the value of the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S1111). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1112). When the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S1112: NO), the process from step S1102 is executed for the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 27A shows a period in which an HI level signal is input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g and 122k, and FIG. 27B shows the HI level signal to the eighth buffer 122h. 27(c) shows a period in which the HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 27(d) shows a HI level signal in the tenth buffer 122j. 27(e) shows the timing of writing history information to the history memory 117.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 27A, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, the history information is written in the history memory 117 at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. After that, at the timing of t2, the signal switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 is switched to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 27A. However, the signal is a signal input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g and 122k, and the switching of the LOW level is not a target for storing history information. At the timing, writing of history information is not executed as shown in FIG.

Then, at each of the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t6, the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal input to any of the 11 buffers 122a to 122g and 122k is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, at each of these timings, the history information is written as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 27B, the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h becomes the HI level from the timing of t4 to the timing of t7. The eighth buffer 122h corresponds to the presence/absence of the open/close execution mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27E, the timing t4, which is the timing when the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t7. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t4 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing of t7 includes end information. As a result, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the open/close execution mode.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, or the second operating opening 34 is in the opening/closing execution mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered the car is in the opening/closing execution mode.

As illustrated in FIG. 27C, the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i becomes the HI level from the timing of t8 to the timing of t11. The ninth buffer 122i corresponds to the presence/absence of the high frequency support mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27(e), the timing of t8, which is the timing when the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t11. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t8 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing of t11 includes end information. As a result, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, the execution period of the high frequency support mode can be grasped.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, history information indicating that a ball has entered into any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is displayed even in the high-frequency support mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered the high frequency support mode is in the high frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 27D, the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j becomes the HI level from the timing of t12 to the timing of t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27E, the timing t12 when the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing of t15. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t12 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing of t15 includes end information. As a result, by confirming the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, history information indicating that a ball has entered into any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is opening the front door frame 14. It is possible to distinguish whether or not it is. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered the car is during opening of the front door frame 14.

Next, the output process of the set value update signal executed when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set by the main CPU 63 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the output processing of the set value update signal executed by the main CPU 63. The output process of the set value update signal is executed in step S119 in the main process (FIG. 9).

A value corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is set in the pulse number counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1201). Specifically, the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is set in the pulse number counter. Then, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal directed to the management CPU 112 is at the HI level (step S1202). As described above, the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the management IC 66. Here, the output processing of the set value update signal is processing for causing the management-side CPU 112 to specify the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the main processing (FIG. 9). It is executed at a timing before a certain recognition process. On the other hand, the fact that the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is set in the management IC 66 at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the set value update signal is output before the recognition process. Even if the processing is executed, it becomes possible for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is the set value update signal.

When a negative determination is made in step S1202, the value of the LOW level counter provided in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1203), and whether or not the value of the LOW level counter after the decrement is 1 is "0". It is determined (step S1204). The LOW level counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the set value update signal has been kept at the LOW level for a predetermined period while a plurality of pulses in which the set value update signal becomes the HI level is output. Is. When the value of the LOW level counter is “0” (step S1204: YES), it means that it is time to set the set value update signal to the HI level, so the set value update signal is set to the HI level. It is set (step S1205).

Then, "20" is set to the HI level counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1206). The HI level counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the period during which the set value update signal is maintained at the HI level. Since the value set in the HI level counter is decremented by 1 in a cycle of about 10 microseconds, the set value update signal is maintained at the HI level for 200 microseconds when one pulse is output. This HI level maintenance period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the set value update signal has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

When the set value update signal is at the HI level (step S1202: YES), the value of the HI level counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1207), and the value of the HI level counter after the decrement by 1 is set to "0". It is determined whether or not (step S1208). When the value of the HI level counter is "0" (step S1208: YES), it means that it is time to set the set value update signal to the LOW level, so the set value update signal is set to the LOW level. It is set (step S1209).

After that, the value of the pulse number counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1210), and it is determined whether the value of the pulse number counter after the decrement by 1 is "0" (step S1211). When the value of the pulse number counter is not “0” (step S1211: NO), the output of the pulse signal by the set value update signals for the number corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is completed. Since it means that there is not, "20" is set to the LOW level counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1212). Since the value set in the LOW level counter is decremented by 1 in a cycle of about 10 microseconds, the LOW level is maintained for 200 microseconds between a plurality of pulse outputs by the set value update signal. This LOW level maintenance period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the set value update signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level.

When the value of the pulse number counter is "0" (step S1211: YES), it means that the output of the pulse signals by the set value update signals for the number corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is completed. Therefore, the output processing of the setting value identification end command is executed (step S1213). The set value identification end command is a command for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output of the set value update signal for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is completed. When outputting the set value identification end command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used as in the identification start command, the type identification command, and the identification end command. However, the signal pattern of the set value identification end command is different from the identification start command, the type identification command, and the identification end command.

As described above, in the output processing of the set value update signal, the pulse signals of the set value update signals corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set at the start of the supply of the operating power this time are output to the management IC 66. To do. The management side CPU 112 grasps the number of pulse signals by the set value update signal by executing the setting update recognition process, and grasps the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time based on this.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the setting update recognition process executed by the management CPU 112. The setting update recognition process is executed in step S902 of the management process (FIG. 23).

It is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1301). If an affirmative decision is made in step S1301, the value of the set value grasping counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is set to "1" (step S1302). The set value grasping counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10. For example, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

After that, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S1303). If an affirmative decision is made in step S1303, the value of the set value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1304). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management-side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

When a negative determination is made in step S1303, or when the processing of step S1304 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1305). When a negative determination is made in step S1305, the process returns to step S1303.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, the RTC information that is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S1306). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1307). In the writing process, the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is referred to identify the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target, and the pointer information corresponds to the writing target pointer information. The RTC information read in step S1306 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the setting value information when the setting is performed, The combination is stored as history information.

After that, the target pointer is updated (step S1308). In the update processing, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set by performing the setting update recognition process as described above, the setting is performed, the date and time when the setting is performed, and the setting. A combination of set values when the setting is performed is stored in the history area 124 as history information. Accordingly, the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the setting is performed by reading and analyzing the information stored in the history memory 117 by using the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d. It becomes possible to grasp the contents of the set value when the setting is performed.

Here, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the information stored in the history memory 117 is maintained as it is. As a result, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being deleted, and various parameters to be described later are the timing of changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It is calculated by using the history information existing before and after. In this case, since the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set as described above is stored in the history memory 117, it is stored in the history memory 117 by connecting an external device to the reading terminal 68d. By reading the information, it becomes possible to calculate various parameters after the timing when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and during the period when the setting state is maintained.

Next, the display output process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The display output process is executed in step S909 of the management process (FIG. 23).

First, it is determined whether it is the calculation timing (step S1401). If 51 seconds have passed since the supply of the operating power to the management CPU 112 was started, or if 51 seconds have passed since the affirmative determination was made last time in step S1401, an affirmative determination is made in step S1401. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, various numbers of normally entered balls are calculated (step S1402). Specifically, first, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 in which the correspondence information indicating the outlets 24a is stored, Calculate the number of incoming balls. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the winning into the general winning opening 31 is achieved. Calculate the number. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the corresponding relationship information indicating the special electric prize winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, it is possible to enter the special electric prize winning device 32. Calculate the number. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the corresponding relationship information indicating the first operation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the first operation port 33 is stored. Calculate the number of incoming balls. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the second operation ports 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the number of the history information storage areas 125 is increased. Calculate the number of incoming balls.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating the front door frame 14 are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the exit port generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34 are respectively calculated (step S1403). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and The period between the end information and the history information storage area 125 is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is the serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relation indicating the front door frame 14 are stored. When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the total number of entered balls for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is present. If the correspondence information and the end information indicating the front door frame 14 are not stored in the history information storage area 125 in which is stored, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored. The history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as when the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

Then, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1402 and S1403 (step S1404). Specifically, first, the number of incoming balls generated during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1403 is subtracted from each number of incoming balls calculated in step S1402. Then, the following first to eighth parameters are calculated using the respective numbers of incoming balls after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a calculated in step S1402 and the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a calculated in step S1403 is defined as the number of entered balls K1, and the number of the general winning openings 31 calculated in step S1402 is calculated. The difference in the number of balls of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls entered K2, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls of the special prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1402 The difference in the number of entered balls in 32 is K3, and the difference in the number of entered balls in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of entered balls in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1402 The number K4 is defined as the number K4, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1402 and the number of balls entered in the second operation port 34 is set as number K5.
-First parameter: total payout number of game balls (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning in general prize hole 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "first working hole The ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio) "D1")
-Second parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls K2 into the general winning opening 31 / the total number of game balls (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) discharged from the game area PA-Third parameter: game balls into the special electric prize winning device 32 Ratio of the total number of entered balls K3/the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) The fourth parameter: The total number of entered game balls into the first working port 33 K4/discharged from the game area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D2”)
-Fifth parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls K5 entering the second operating port 34/the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D3")
-Sixth parameter: D1-(D2 x "number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + D3 x "number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")
-Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning in second working port 34")/total payout number of game balls (K2 x "general "Number of prize balls for winning in prize hole 31" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning in first working port 33" + K5 x "Second working port 34" 8th parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" / total payout number of game balls (K2 x for winning in general winning hole 31) "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34" )) In step S1404, the first to eighth parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the normal-time storage area of the calculation result memory 131. The first to eighth parameters stored in the normal time storage area are stored and held until the next step S1404 is executed. That is, when the next step S1404 is executed and the first to eighth parameters are calculated, the newly calculated first to eighth parameters are stored in the normal time storage area, The previous calculation results of the first to eighth parameters stored in the normal-time storage area are overwritten.

Then, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the end information and the history information storage area 125, the outlet 24a and the general winning opening 31 generated in the opening/closing execution mode are referred to. , The special electric prize winning device 32, the first actuating port 33 and the second actuating port 34, respectively, the number of incoming balls is calculated (step S1405). A history information storage area 125 that stores correspondence information and start information indicating the open/close execution mode in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and correspondence information and end information indicating the open/close execution mode. Is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Further, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the total number of incoming balls for the section is calculated. Further, although the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and the start information are stored exists, the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored. When the stored history information storage area 125 does not store the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and the end information, the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and the start information are stored. All history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as in the open/close execution mode.

After that, during the period of the opening/closing execution mode specified in step S1405, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the opening 24a generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state. The number of balls entering each of the second working ports 34 is calculated (step S1406). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as the case of step S1403, except that the period of the open/close execution mode specified in step S1405 is assumed.

Then, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of step S1405 and step S1406 (step S1407). Specifically, first, the number of incoming balls generated during opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1406 is subtracted from the number of incoming balls calculated in step S1405. Then, the following eleventh to eighteenth parameters are calculated by using the respective numbers of incoming balls after the subtraction. The difference in the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a calculated in step S1405 is defined as the number K11 of entered balls, and the number of the general winning openings 31 calculated in step S1405 is calculated. The difference in the number of balls of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number K12 of balls received, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls of the special prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1405 The difference in the number of entered balls of 32 is K13, and the difference in the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1405 is entered. The number K14 is defined as the number of balls K15, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1405 and the number of balls entered in the second operation port 34 is set as number K15 of the entered balls.
Eleventh parameter: total payout number of game balls (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning in general prize hole 31" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K14 x "first operating port 33" Ratio of the number of prize balls for winning in the prize”+K15דnumber of prize balls for winning in the second operation port 34)/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is “ D11")
・Twelfth parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K12 into the general winning opening 31/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) ・Thirteenth parameter: game ball to the special prize winning device 32 Ratio of the total number of entered balls K13/the total number of game balls (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) discharged from the game area PA. The 14th parameter: the total number of entered game balls into the first working port 33 K14/discharged from the game area PA. Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D12”)
Fifteenth parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls K15 entering the second operating port 34/the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D13”)
-Sixteenth parameter: D11-(D12 x "number of prize balls for winning in first operating port 33" + D13 x "number of prize balls for winning in second operating port 34")
17th parameter: (K13 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")/total payout number of gaming balls (K12 x "general “Number of prize balls for winning in prize hole 31”+K13דNumber of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32”+K14דNumber of prize balls for prize in first operating port 33”+K15דSecond operating port 34” 18th parameter: K13 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" / total payout number of game balls (K12 x for winning in general winning hole 31) "Number of prize balls" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric prize winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 x "Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34" In step S1407, the 11th to 18th parameters, which are the calculation result, are stored in the storage area for opening/closing execution mode in the calculation result memory 131. The 11th to 18th parameters stored in the storage area for opening/closing execution mode are stored and held until the next step S1407 is executed. That is, when the next step S1407 is executed and the first to eighteenth parameters are calculated, the newly calculated first to eighteenth parameters are stored in the storage area for opening/closing execution mode. The previous calculation results of the 11th to 18th parameters stored in the storage area for the opening/closing execution mode are overwritten.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating the high frequency support mode. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the outlet 24a generated in the high frequency support mode, The number of balls entered into each of the winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1408). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and The period between the end information and the history information storage area 125 is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Further, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relation indicating the high frequency support mode. When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the total number of entered balls for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored, the RTC information corresponding to the time later than the history information storage area 125 is present. If the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the end information are not stored in the history information storage area 125 in which is stored, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the high frequency support mode are stored. All history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as in the high frequency support mode.

After that, during the period of the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1408, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, and the first operating opening 33 that are generated when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Then, the number of balls entering each of the second operation ports 34 is calculated (step S1409). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as that in step S1403, except that the period of the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1408 is assumed.

Then, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1408 and S1409 (step S1410). Specifically, first, the number of incoming balls generated during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1409 is subtracted from each number of incoming balls calculated in step S1408. Then, the following 21st to 26th parameters are calculated using the respective numbers of incoming balls after the subtraction. The difference in the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a calculated in step S1408 is defined as the number of entered balls K21, and the number of the general winning openings 31 calculated in step S1408 is calculated. The difference between the number of balls of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1409 and the number of balls K22 is calculated as the number of balls K22, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1409 is calculated with respect to the number of balls of the special prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1408. The difference in the number of entered balls of 32 is K23, and the difference in the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1408 is entered. The number K24 is defined as the number K24, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the second working port 34 calculated in step S1408 and the number of balls entered in the second working port 34 is set as number K25.
21st parameter: total payout number of game balls (K22 x "number of prize balls for winning in general prize hole 31" + K23 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K24 x "first operating port 33" The ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “the number of prize balls for winning the prize”+K25דthe number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34”) D11")
-Twenty-second parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K22 to the general winning opening 31 / total number of game balls (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) discharged from the game area PA-Twenty-third parameter: game ball to special prize winning device 32 Ratio of the total number of entered balls K23/the total number of game balls (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) discharged from the game area PA. The 24th parameter: the total number of entered game balls K24 into the first working port 33/discharged from the game area PA. Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D22”)
25th parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls K25 entering the second operation port 34/the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D23”)
-Twenty-sixth parameter: D21-(D22 x "number of prize balls for winning in first operating port 33" + D23 x "number of prize balls for winning in second operating port 34")
In step S1410, the 21st to 26th parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the storage area for high frequency support mode in the calculation result memory 131. The 21st to 26th parameters stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area are stored and held until the next step S1410 is executed. That is, when the next step S1410 is executed and the 21st to 26th parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 21st to 26th parameters are stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area. Then, the previous calculation results of the 21st to 26th parameters stored in the storage area for the high frequency support mode are overwritten.

Then, the frequency of occurrence of the open/close execution mode is calculated and stored (step S1411). Specifically, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating the opening/closing execution mode are stored, the opening/closing execution mode is calculated. Calculate the number of occurrences of. Further, the number of times the game times have occurred is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the game times have started is stored in the history area 117 of the history memory 117. .. Then, the number of times the open/close execution mode is generated per unit game time is calculated. The number of times the open/close execution mode is generated is K31, and the number of game times is K32.
・Thirty-first parameter: K31/K32
In step S1411, the 31st parameter which is the calculation result is stored in the storage area for opening/closing execution mode frequency in the calculation result memory 131. The 31st parameter stored in the storage area for opening/closing execution mode frequency is stored and held until the next step S1411 is executed. That is, when the next step S1411 is executed and the 31st parameter is calculated, the newly calculated 31st parameter is stored in the opening/closing execution mode frequency storage area, so that the opening/closing execution mode is changed until then. The previous calculation result of the 31st parameter stored in the frequency storage area is overwritten.

Then, the frequency of occurrence of the high frequency support mode is calculated and stored (step S1412). Specifically, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the high frequency Calculate the number of occurrences of support mode. Further, the number of times the game times have occurred is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the game times have started is stored in the history area 117 of the history memory 117. .. Then, the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode per unit game time, and the ratio of the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode to the number of occurrences of the open/close execution mode are calculated. The number of times the high frequency support mode is generated is K41, the number of times the game is played is K42, and the number of times the open/close execution mode is calculated in step S1411 is K43.
41st parameter: K41/K42
42nd parameter: K41/K43
In step S1412, the 41st to 42nd parameters that are the calculation results are stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area of the calculation result memory 131. The 41st to 42nd parameters stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area are stored and held until the next step S1412 is executed. That is, when the next step S1412 is executed and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 41st to 42nd parameters are stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area. Then, the previous calculation results of the 41st to 42nd parameters stored in the storage area for high frequency support mode frequency are overwritten.

When a negative determination is made in step S1401 or when the processing of step S1412 is executed, the display processing is executed (step S1413). FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the display process.

First, the value of the update timing counter provided in the management-side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S1501). The update timing counter is a counter for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that it is time to update the display content of the management result of the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The management-side CPU 112 controls the display of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and thereby the first to eighth parameters, the first to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, and the thirty-first parameter. The parameters and the calculation results of the 41st to 42nd parameters are reported. In this case, the first notification display device 69a displays information corresponding to the type of parameter to be notified. In addition, among the values obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100, the number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, and the number corresponding to the ones place is displayed for the third notification. It is displayed on the device 69c. And in the 1st-3rd notification display devices 69a-69c, the said 1st-8th parameters, the said 11th-18th parameters, the said 21st-26th parameters, the said 31st parameters, and the said 41st-. The display corresponding to the calculation result of the 42nd parameter is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the 42nd parameter, which is the display object in the last order, is displayed, the display object in the first order is displayed. The calculation result of one parameter is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds.

Here, the calculation cycle of the various parameters in the management side CPU 112 is 51 seconds. On the other hand, the number of various parameters is 25, and the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. Therefore, the various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are displayed at least once on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

When the process of step S1501 is executed, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are updated by determining whether the value of the update timing counter after subtracting 1 is "0". It is determined whether or not the timing has come (step S1502). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, the value of the display target counter provided in the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1503). When the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "24" (step S1504: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S1505).

The display target counter is a counter for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of parameter to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Of the first to eighth parameters, the first to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameters and the fourteenth to forty-second parameters, and the display target counters of "0" to "24" There is a one-to-one correspondence with the possible values. For example, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the first parameter, which is the first display target, becomes the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the value of the display target counter is "24". In the case of, the 42nd parameter, which is the last display target, becomes the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

If a negative determination is made in step S1504, or if the process of step S1505 is executed, the first notification display device 69a is displayed so that information corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed. It is controlled (step S1506). Further, the parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the calculation result memory 131, the read parameter is multiplied by 100, and the number corresponding to the tens digit is displayed on the second notification display device 69b. The number corresponding to the ones digit is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S1507). The contents displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in step S1506 and step S1507 are continued until the next update timing or until the supply of operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is stopped. It Then, the value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 as the value corresponding to the next update timing (step S1508).

When the supply of operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is started by executing the display processing as described above, the game history management results are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. To be done. The management result of the game history is displayed regardless of whether the game is continued or not, and the main body of the gaming machine 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 so that the main controller 60 is operated from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It is performed regardless of whether it is visible. In this way, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is executed regardless of the game situation or the state of the pachinko machine 10, so that the first to third notification display device 69a is executed. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of ~69c.

The display of the management result of the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is started after the supply of the operating power to the management CPU 112 is started and after the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63. To be done. In this case, like the information stored in the history memory 117, the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is stored and retained even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Therefore, when the supply of the operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is started, the management result of the game history calculated before the supply of the operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is stopped is displayed.

When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, information corresponding to the set value being changed is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. However, while the display of the information corresponding to the set value is performed before the identification end command is transmitted from the main CPU 63, the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The display of the management result of is started after the identification end command is transmitted from the main CPU 63. Accordingly, even if the third notification display device 69c is also used as a display device for displaying information corresponding to the set value and displaying the management result of the game history, these displays are displayed. It is possible to prevent the periods from overlapping.

When the information corresponding to the set value is displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are hidden. On the other hand, when the game history management result is displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not hidden. This makes it possible to identify which of the display of information corresponding to the set value and the display of the game history management result is being performed on the third notification display device 69c.

Next, regarding the processing configuration for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62 explain. FIG. 32A is a flowchart showing the data output process executed by the main CPU 63. The data output process is executed in step S112 in the main process (FIG. 9).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether or not the connection signal indicating that the external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d is received from the reading terminal 68d (step S1601). When a negative determination is made in step S1601, this data output process is ended as it is. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63. As a result, in order to output the history information and various parameters to the outside, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started with the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. Need to Since the power switch for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is provided in the payout mechanism unit 73 mounted on the back surface of the back pack unit 15, these stopping and starting operations are performed. In order to do so, it is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 to expose the back surface of the back pack unit 15. Under such circumstances, in order to output the history information and various parameters to the outside, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started with the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. With the configuration that needs to be performed, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the operation of reading the history information and various parameters even if a person other than the game hall manager performs the operation.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined whether or not a signal for confirming control information is received from the reading terminal 68d, so that the current connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is the main ROM 64. It is determined whether or not the control information (program and data) is checked (step S1602). The external device has a configuration that allows both confirmation of control information and confirmation of history information and various parameters.When confirmation of control information is selected by manual operation on the external device, the external device can confirm the control information. A signal for control information confirmation is transmitted, and when confirmation of history information and various parameters is selected by manual operation on the external device, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the external device. Note that the configuration is not limited to this, and the control information confirmation external device and the history confirmation external device may be separate. In this case, when an external device for checking control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, a signal for checking control information is transmitted from the external device, and an external device for checking history is sent to the reading terminal 68d. When the device is electrically connected, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the external device.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1602, an output process for confirming control information is executed (step S1603). In the output process, a program and data are read from the main ROM 64 as control information, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 68d. As a result, the control information can be read by the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and it can be confirmed whether the control information is regular or normal. Will be possible.

When a negative determination is made in step S1602, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management side CPU 112 (step S1604). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. This HI level output state is continued for a specific period. The specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. When the output state of the output instruction signal is switched to the HI level, the management side CPU 112 executes the process for outputting the history information.

Specifically, when the management-side CPU 112 switches the output state of the output instruction signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p of the input port 121 from the LOW level to the HI level, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. (Step S1701: YES), the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the operation result memory 131 are read out, and the read history information and various parameters are output to the reading terminal 68d. (Step S1702). As a result, the history information and various parameters can be read by the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and the information on the management result of the game history can be analyzed. When the management-side CPU 112 outputs the history information to the reading terminal 68d, the management-side CPU 112 clears the history memory 117 by "0" (step S1703). The history information in the history memory 117 is deleted only when the history information is read by the external device.

Returning to the description of the data output process (FIG. 32A), when the process of step S1603 is performed or when the process of step S1604 is performed, the electrical connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is continued. It is determined whether it has been done (step S1605). If it is continued (step S1605: YES), the process stands by in step S1605. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the external device is disconnected from the reading terminal 68d. When the connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is released (step S1605: NO), this data output process ends.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

Since the game ball is paid out when the game ball enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, the player can select one of these entering portions. A game will be played while expecting a game ball to enter. In this configuration, the game ball enters the any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 (hereinafter, also referred to as a history target entering portion). If the occurrence occurs, the history information corresponding to it will be stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can store and hold information for managing the number of game balls or the frequency of entering the game balls into each history target ball entering unit, and use this managed information. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the entry mode of the game ball into each history target entry part. Further, since the history information is stored and held by the pachinko machine 10 itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

All the ball-in units for ejecting the game balls from the game area PA are targets for executing the history information storage process and are targets for management using the history information. As a result, it becomes possible to manage the ball entry frequency for any history-targeted ball entry section by using the history information. In addition, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering each history target ball portion to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA, using history information.

The history information includes RTC information, which is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the history-targeted ball entering section that has triggered the storage of the history information. With this, by using the history information, it is possible to grasp the entry history of the game ball into the history entry ball portion in detail.

In the memory 117 for history, not only history information corresponding to the game ball entering the history target ball-entering section, but also history information indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, and the high-frequency support mode is in effect. The history information indicating whether or not and the history information indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open are stored. As a result, it is possible to manage whether or not the game sphere enters the history target ball-in part by distinguishing whether or not each of these situations is present.

It is possible to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to an external device which is a device outside the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to read history information with an external device and use the read history information to analyze the ball entry mode of the game ball into the history target ball entry section.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d, and the program can be read from the main ROM 64 by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is externally output using the reading terminal 68d for externally outputting the program. This makes it possible to output history information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

The information to be output from the reading terminal 68d is specified as a program or history information, and the information on the side corresponding to the specification result is externally output through the reading terminal 68d. As a result, in the configuration in which the history information is externally output using the reading terminal 68d for externally outputting the program, it is determined whether the information to be externally output is the program or the history information. It is specified on the side, and the specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, it is possible to read only the necessary information even if the reading terminal 68d is also used.

Based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, it is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 68d is the program or the history information. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the selection of information to be output to the outside from becoming complicated.

An MPU 62 having a main ROM 64 that stores a program in advance has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 68d. As a result, the signal paths for the reading terminal 68d can be integrated in the MPU 62. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the reading terminal 68d.

The main CPU 63 that executes a process for paying out the game ball based on the game ball entering any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. In addition to the above, a management CPU 112 is provided, and the management CPU 112 executes processing for storing history information in the history memory 117. As a result, it is possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball into each history target entry part while preventing the processing load of the main CPU 63 from increasing excessively.

The main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 uses the signal paths corresponding to the detection results of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a and the signal paths corresponding to the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, respectively, to the buffers of the input port 121 of the management IC 66. 122a to 122g. As a result, the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each buffer 122a to 122g (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

The main CPU 63 has information indicating whether the open/close execution mode is in effect, information indicating whether the high frequency support mode is in effect, information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open, And the information corresponding to the start of the game time is transmitted to each of the buffers 122h to 122k of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 by using the signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the type of information corresponding to each of these situations corresponds to each of the buffers 122h to 122k (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management side CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible.

The main CPU 63 transmits to the management CPU 112 correspondence information indicating which type of information each of the buffers 122a to 122k (that is, each of the signal paths 118a to 118k) corresponds to. As a result, it is not necessary to store the correspondence information in the management IC 66 in advance. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, in a situation in which a game ball may enter the history-target entrance portion, the management IC 66 can identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history-target entrance portion. It becomes possible to become.

Correspondence relationship information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 by using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not the game sphere has entered the history target entry portion. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with the configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting the correspondence information is provided.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. As a result, each time the main CPU 63 transmits the information of the detection result of each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, the information that enables the management target IC 66 to identify the history target entrance part corresponding to the information of the transmission target. Eliminates the need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the detection result of each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

When the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is switched from LOW level to HI level, information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d. In this case, the fact that the signal path corresponding to the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal can be specified by the management-side CPU 112 without receiving the correspondence information from the main-side CPU 63. .. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of the correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, the number of which is larger than the number of types of information required to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Has been. As a result, even when the number of types of the information increases or decreases according to the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to deal with it without changing the configuration related to the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

When the history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d, the correspondence information indicating the type of the history-target ball entrance portion corresponding to the history information is included in each history information. As a result, it is possible to specify the entry mode of the game ball into each history target entry part by using the read history information.

By using the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the management IC 66, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh parameter, eleventh parameter) corresponding to the entering mode of the game ball in the game area PA in a predetermined period are used. ~ 18th parameter, 21st to 26th parameter, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameter) are calculated. Then, various parameters resulting from these calculations are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. As a result, it becomes possible for the pachinko machine 10 to notify various parameters that are the results of calculations using the history information.

Various parameters are calculated in a state where history information corresponding to the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is excluded. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. In addition, various parameters corresponding to the open/close execution mode and the high-frequency support mode are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to understand the entry mode of the game ball according to each situation.

When the history information of the history memory 117 is output to the external device, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clear processing of the history memory 117. As a result, the history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 becomes a storage target in the history memory 117, and the history information that should normally be stored and retained is erased by overwriting. It becomes possible to make it difficult to generate.

When the game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, an external output corresponding to the game ball is output through the external terminal board 97, and the history information is stored in the history memory 117. .. With this, by using the information output to the outside through the external terminal board 97, the history while easily grasping the number and the frequency of entering the game balls into the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34. By using the history information stored in the memory 117 for use, it is possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls and the frequency of entering the game balls into the history target ball-in portion.

The probability of a jackpot result in the low-probability mode changes depending on the setting states of the "setting 1" to "setting 6" of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, even with a single pachinko machine 10, it is possible to cause a situation in which the probability of a jackpot result in the low-probability mode is advantageous or disadvantageous. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The probability of a jackpot result in the low-probability mode varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, while the probability of a jackpot result in the high-probability mode is set by the pachinko machine 10. It does not change depending on the condition. This makes it possible to limit the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 to the probability of a jackpot result to the situation in the low-probability mode. Further, since the high probability table 64g referred to in the high probability mode can be made common regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to preliminarily set the table 64a to 64g in the main ROM 64. It is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity for storing.

The probability of a jackpot result in the low-probability mode varies according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of "setting 1" to "setting 6", while the distribution mode of the types of jackpot results depends on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It does not change accordingly. This makes it possible to limit the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 to the situation in the low probability mode. Further, since it is possible to make the distribution table 64h referred to when distributing the types of jackpot results common to any of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10, the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64. It is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity for storing in advance.

Even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is not erased but stored and retained. As a result, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information up to that point can be continuously stored in the history memory 117, and the history memory can be stored for a long time. It is possible to specify the management result of the game history by using the history information accumulated in 117.

Even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, in the configuration in which the history information stored in the history memory 117 is not erased but stored and retained, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. When the process is performed, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history memory 117. As a result, it becomes possible to distinguish between the history information before the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 and the history information after the new setting.

When the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history memory 117 by newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the information corresponding to the set value is included in the history information. As a result, it becomes possible to specify the content of the setting value set in the past by referring to the history information.

In addition, when various parameters are calculated at the calculation timing, the history information corresponding to a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 is used as a reference and history information stored after that is used. Then, it may be configured to calculate various parameters. In this case, the management result of the game history at the timing after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed can be derived as various parameters.

Further, when various parameters are calculated at the calculation timing, history information corresponding to a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117, and history information corresponding to a change of the set value is used as a reference. Alternatively, the history information stored after that may be used to calculate various parameters. In this case, it becomes possible to derive the management result of the game history at the timing after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed as various parameters.

Although the board box 60a of the main controller 60 is provided with the opening for exposing the reading terminal 68d, the opening is not provided and the reading terminal 69d is provided on the opposite wall 60b. It may be configured to be covered by. In this case, it is necessary to open the substrate box 60a in order to connect an external device to the reading terminal 68d.

<Second Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the contents of the win/loss table corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are different from those of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM 64 in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the main ROM 64, a setting 1 area 161, a setting 2 area 162, a setting 3 area 163, a setting 4 area 164, a setting 5 area 165, and a setting 6 area. 166 are provided. In the setting 1 area 161, the low probability table 161a for setting 1 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1” and the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 are shown. The high probability table 161b for setting 1, which is referred to when the setting state of "is 1" and the winning/winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, is stored. In the setting 2 area 162, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2” and the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, the low probability table 162a for setting 2 which is referred to when the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 are provided. And the highly probable hit/miss table 162b for the setting 2 that is referred to when the win/win lottery mode is the high-probability mode. In the setting 3 area 163, the low probability table 163a for setting 3 which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3” and the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The high probability table 163b for setting 3, which is referred to when the setting state of “is 3” and the winning/winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, is stored.

In the setting 4 area 164, the low probability table 164a for setting 4 which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4” and the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 are shown. The high probability table 164b for setting 4 which is referred to when the setting state of "is 4" and the winning/winning lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored. In the setting 5 area 165, the low-probability/probability table 165a for setting 5, which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5” and the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 are provided. And a high probability table 165b for setting 5, which is referred to when the setting state of “is 5” and the winning/winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the setting 6 area 166, the low probability table 166a for setting 6 which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 6” and the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 are shown. The high-probability/probability table 166b for setting 6, which is referred to when the setting state of “is 6” and the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, is stored.

The winning probabilities of the jackpot results set in each of the low certainty win/loss tables 161a to 166a are different from each other. Specifically, when the low-probability/probability table 161a for setting 1 is referenced, the jackpot result is about 1/320, and when the low-probability/probability table 162a for setting 2 is referenced, about 1/310. Results in a big hit, about 1/300 when the low probability table 163a for setting 3 is referred to, and about 1/290 when a low probability table 164a for setting 4 is referenced. Results in a big hit, about 1/280 when the low probability table 165a for setting 5 is referred to, and about 1/270 when a low accuracy table 166a for setting 6 is referred to. The result is a big hit. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high setting value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the low-probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

The winning probabilities of the jackpot results set in the high-probability winning/losing tables 161b to 166b are different from each other. Specifically, when the high-probability/probability table 161b for setting 1 is referenced, the jackpot result is about 1/45, and when the high-probability/probability table 162b for setting 2 is referenced, it is about 1/40. Results in a big hit, and when the high-accuracy hit/miss table 163b for setting 3 is referred to, the jackpot result is obtained at about 1/35. When the high-accuracy hit/miss table 164b for setting 4 is referred to, approximately 1/30 Results in a big hit, and when the high-accuracy hit/miss table 165b for setting 5 is referred to, the result is about 1/25. When the high-accuracy hit/miss table 166b for setting 6 is referred, it is about 1/20. The result is a big hit. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high setting value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the high probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

That is, in the first embodiment, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode becomes higher as the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes higher, while the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode becomes “Setting 1”. Although the configuration is common in any of the setting states of “setting 6”, in the present embodiment, both the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low-probability mode and the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high-probability mode are pachinko. The higher the setting value of the machine 10, the higher the setting value. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's advantage with respect to the fact that a high set value is set.

In addition, even if the winning probability of the jackpot result of the low probability mode in the case of the highest setting state "setting 6", the winning of the jackpot result of the high probability mode in the case of the lowest setting state "setting 1" It is set lower than the probability. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's advantage when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1” from becoming extremely low, and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting”. It is possible to prevent the player's advantage in the case of "6" from becoming extremely high.

On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, only one sort table 64h is provided so as to be common regardless of the setting states of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. As a result, it is possible to prevent the distribution state of the jackpot result from being advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, and the storage capacity for storing the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64 in advance. Can be suppressed.

The winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, whereas the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher in the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. The configuration may be such that the set value is lower. In this case, in the low probability mode, the higher the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, the more advantageous the player is to the setting value, and in the high probability mode, the lower the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, the better the setting value is to the player. It becomes possible.

The winning probability of the jackpot result in the high-probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, while the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low-probability mode is “setting 1” to “setting 6”. The configuration may be constant in the setting state of ". In this case, in the high-probability mode, the higher the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the more advantageous the setting value for the player, and in the low-probability mode, it is possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage due to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from occurring. Become.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the management result of the game history when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

The management IC 66 is provided with a separate storage memory 171 as a memory for storing information in addition to the memories in the first embodiment. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the separate storage memory 171. The separate storage memory 171 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage storage (that is, a non-volatile storage unit), and is used for both reading and writing.

The separate storage memory 171 is provided with a first separate storage area 172, a second separate storage area 173, a third separate storage area 174, a fourth separate storage area 175, and a fifth separate storage area 176. Information of the management result of the game history calculated when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set in these first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, more specifically, the first embodiment. The various parameters described in (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameters) are sequentially stored. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, various parameters are first stored in the first separate storage area 172, and thereafter, every time the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the n-th type. The areas to be stored are switched so that the storage areas 172 to 176 → the (n+1)th storage areas 172 to 176 are stored. When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set after the various parameters are stored in the fifth separate storage area 176, the various parameters are stored again in the first separate storage area 172. At this time, the various parameters already stored in the first separate storage area 172 are erased. As a result, various parameters until the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed 5 times are stored in the separate storage memory 171, and the oldest various parameters are erased when the number of times exceeds 5 times. It will be remembered.

The various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by the external device by connecting the external device to the reading terminal 68d. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history before the new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the setting update recognition process in this embodiment executed by the management-side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1801: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". It is set (step S1802). The set value grasping counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10. For example, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S1803). If an affirmative decision is made in step S1803, the value of the set value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1804). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management-side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

When a negative determination is made in step S1803 or when the process of step S1804 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1805). When a negative determination is made in step S1805, the process returns to step S1803.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1805, repeated change monitoring processing is executed (step S1806). Although details of the repeated change monitoring process will be described later, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 repeatedly occurs in a short period of time, a process for notifying it is executed. In the configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 every time a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the management result of the game history when the game is played for a predetermined period is intended. It is assumed that new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time so as to be erased automatically. On the other hand, by repeatedly performing the change monitoring process, when such an action is performed, the corresponding notification is performed.

After that, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S1807). In various calculation processes, the processes of steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed. Thereby, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameters and fourteenth parameters) are utilized by utilizing the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. ~ 42nd parameter) is calculated.

After that, the various parameters calculated in step S1807 are stored in the areas to be stored this time among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 (step S1808). In the separate storage memory 171, a pointer information area is set so that the management CPU 112 can specify an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. The information in the pointer information area is changed so that when various parameters are stored in the storage target area of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, the storage area is changed to the next order area. Will be updated. By executing the processing of step S1808, various parameters at that time are stored in the separate storage memory 171 for the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 this time.

After that, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S1809). That is, in the present embodiment, not only when the history information is read by the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memory is used. The history information 117 is deleted.

After that, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S1810). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1811). In the writing process, the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is referred to identify the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target, and the pointer information corresponds to the writing target pointer information. The RTC information read in step S1810 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the setting value information when the setting is performed, The combination is stored as history information.

After that, the target pointer is updated (step S1812). In the update processing, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

Next, the repetitive change monitoring process executed in step S1806 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of game times executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was set last time is within a reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) (step S1901). Specifically, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of game times is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. The number of game times executed since the state was set last time is grasped, and it is further judged whether or not the grasped number of game times is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times).

When a positive determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repeat change counter provided in the separate storage memory 171 is incremented by 1 (step S1902). Since the separate storage memory 171 is a memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage as already described, the external storage does not require power supply for storage of the repeated change counter value.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the repeat change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value "5" (step S1903). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S1903, the number of times the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without the execution of the game times exceeding the reference number of times is the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether or not it has exceeded.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1903, display processing of repeated changes is executed (step S1904). In the display process of the repeated change, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c correspond to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 being repeated a number of times exceeding the notification reference value in a short period of time. It is the display content of repeated changes. The display content of the repeated change is the display content that displays "E" on all of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and this display content does not occur in other situations. Further, the state in which the display content of the repeated change is displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is continued until the repeated change flag provided in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0". .. The repeat change flag is a flag for the management CPU 112 to specify that the display contents of the repeat change should be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Further, when the repeated change flag is set to "1" and the display contents of the repeated change are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the display process in the first embodiment described above. (FIG. 31) is not executed. After that, "1" is set to the repeat change flag of the separate storage memory 171 (step S1905).

When a negative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repeat change counter of the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0" (step S1906). After that, on condition that the repeated change flag of the separate storage memory 171 is set to "1" (step S1907: YES), the display contents of the repeated changes on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are displayed. The display is terminated (step S1908), and the repeat change flag is cleared to "0" (step S1909).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

When a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is erased. Thereby, it becomes possible to leave the history information of the game executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117.

When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, various parameters are calculated as the management result of the game history by using the history information of the history memory 117 at that time. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10. Further, even if the history information in the history memory 117 is deleted when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history by the history information to be deleted. It will be possible.

In a configuration in which various parameters are calculated using the history information of the history memory 117 at that time when a new setting state is set in the pachinko machine 10, the calculated various parameters are stored in a separate storage memory. 171 is stored. As a result, even if a new setting state is set in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the setting is performed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

By providing the plurality of separate storage areas 172 to 176 in the separate storage memory 171, it becomes possible to store various parameters corresponding to the setting timing of the setting state for a plurality of times. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods with reference to the timing when the new setting of the setting state is performed. Further, even if new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated under the situation where the game is not played, various parameters calculated by using the history information of the situation where the game is practically played are It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in the separate storage memory 171.

The various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by the external device by connecting the external device to the reading terminal 68d. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history before the new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10.

In the configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 every time a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the management result of the game history when the game is played for a predetermined period is intended. It is assumed that new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time so as to be erased automatically. On the other hand, by repeatedly performing the change monitoring process, when such an action is performed, the corresponding notification is performed. As a result, it becomes possible to notify an administrator or the like that new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

The notification that the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time is performed by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Thereby, by using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying the management result of the game history, new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time. It is possible to make a notification.

In a situation where it is necessary to notify that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time, the display contents of the repeated change are continuously displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The notification of the game history management result at the normal time is not performed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Thereby, it becomes possible to emphasize the notification that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period.

In addition, when the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number of times, the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the total discharge of the game balls discharged from the game area PA after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In a situation where the number is within the reference number, if the event in which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification reference value and continues, a corresponding notification may be executed. In addition, after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined ball entrance portion (for example, any one of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the first operation opening 33, and the second operation opening 34 or a predetermined operation opening). In the situation where the total number of discharged game balls entered in (combination) is within the reference number and the event for which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed. Good. In addition, when the total number of history information items newly stored in the history memory 117 after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number, the event of the new setting is notified. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which when the number exceeds the reference value and continues, the corresponding notification is executed.

Further, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed within the monitoring reference period (for example, 600 seconds) exceeding the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed.

Further, in the situation where the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number of times, the event in which the new setting is performed continuously exceeds the notification reference value. Although the notification corresponding to it is configured to be executed, the set value is changed in a situation where the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number of times. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which when an event exceeds the notification reference value and continues, the corresponding notification is executed.

Further, in the situation where the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number of times, the event in which the new setting is performed continuously exceeds the notification reference value. Although the notification corresponding to that is executed, the new setting is triggered when the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number. When the event in which the various parameters are calculated exceeds the notification reference value and continues, the corresponding notification may be executed.

Further, in the situation where the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number of times, the event in which the new setting is performed continuously exceeds the notification reference value. Although the notification corresponding to the above is executed, the game progress may be restricted in addition to or instead of that for a predetermined period (for example, one hour).

<Fourth Embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that the monitoring process of repeated changes is executed by the main CPU 63. The configuration different from that of the third embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the monitoring process of repeated changes executed by the main CPU 63. It should be noted that the repeated change monitoring process is executed when the set value update process (step S118) is executed in the main process (FIG. 9). That is, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the change monitoring process is repeatedly executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the monitoring process of repeated change is executed when the set value is changed.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of game times executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was set last time is within a reference number (specifically 100 times) (step S2001). The main RAM 65 is provided with a game number counter for measuring the number of game times executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, and the main CPU 63 newly executes the game times. Each time, the value of the game number counter is incremented by 1. The game number counter is excluded from the target of clearing "0" even when the main RAM 65 clearing process (steps S105 and S117) is executed.

When a positive determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repeat change counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2002). The repetitive change counter is excluded from the target of clearing “0” even when the clearing process of the main RAM 65 (steps S105 and S117) is executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the repeat change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value "5" (step S2003). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S2003, the number of times the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without the execution of the game times exceeding the reference number of times is the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether or not it has exceeded.

When a positive determination is made in step S2003, "1" is set to the repeat change flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2004). The repetitive change flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the repetitive change should be notified. The repetitive change flag is excluded from the target of clearing "0" even when the clear process (step S105, step S117) of the main RAM 65 is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repeat change counter of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S2005). After that, on condition that the repeat change flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2006: YES), the repeat change flag is cleared to "0" (step S2007).

In the repeated change monitoring process, when "1" is set in the repeated change flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2008: YES), a repeated change notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S2009). When the sound emission control device 81 receives the notification command of the repeated change, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 notify the repeated change. The notification of the repeated change is continued until the supply of the operating power to the sound emission control device 81 is stopped.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify that new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time based on the control by the main CPU 63. Further, since the notification is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54, even if the gaming machine main body 12 is not opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 It becomes possible for the administrator to recognize that the new setting has been repeated in a short period of time.

When a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the notification command of the repeated change is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81, A configuration may be adopted in which external output corresponding thereto is performed.

Further, the main CPU 63 may execute the repeated change monitoring process in this embodiment, and the management side CPU 112 may execute the repeated change monitoring process in the third embodiment. As a result, it becomes possible to strictly monitor whether a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly set in a short period of time.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the setting update recognition processing in the management side CPU 112 is different from that of the third embodiment. The configuration different from that of the third embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the setting update recognition process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2101: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". It is set (step S2102). The set value grasping counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10. For example, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

After that, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2103). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the value of the set value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2104). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management-side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

When a negative determination is made in step S2103, or when the processing of step S2104 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2105). When a negative determination is made in step S2105, the process returns to step S2103.

When a positive determination is made in step S2105, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number or more of predetermined history information is present in the history memory 117 (step S2106). Specifically, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of game times is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. The number of game times executed since the state was set last time is grasped, and it is further determined whether or not the grasped number of game times exceeds a reference number (specifically 100 times). However, the number is not limited to this, and the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the game balls have been discharged from the game area PA is stored is a reference number (specifically 1000). It may be configured to determine in step S2106 whether or not it exceeds. Correspondence relationship information indicating that the game ball has entered a predetermined ball entrance portion (for example, any one of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the first operation opening 33, and the second operation opening 34 or a predetermined combination) It may be configured to determine in step S2106 whether or not the number of history information storage areas 125 in which is stored exceeds the reference number (specifically, 1000). Further, it may be configured to determine in step S2106 whether the total number of history information stored in the history memory 117 (specifically, 1000) is exceeded.

In addition, when the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number of times, the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the total discharge of the game balls discharged from the game area PA after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In a situation where the number is within the reference number, if the event in which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification reference value and continues, a corresponding notification may be executed. In addition, after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined ball entrance portion (for example, any one of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the first operation opening 33, and the second operation opening 34 or a predetermined operation opening). In the situation where the total number of discharged game balls entered in (combination) is within the reference number and the event for which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed. Good. In addition, when the total number of history information items newly stored in the history memory 117 after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number, the event of the new setting is notified. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which when the number exceeds the reference value and continues, the corresponding notification is executed.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2107). In various calculation processes, the processes of steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed. Thereby, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameters and fourteenth parameters) are utilized by utilizing the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. ~ 42nd parameter) is calculated.

After that, the various parameters calculated in step S2107 are stored in the areas to be stored this time among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 (step S2108). In the separate storage memory 171, a pointer information area is set so that the management CPU 112 can specify an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. The information in the pointer information area is changed so that when various parameters are stored in the storage target area of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, the storage area is changed to the next order area. Will be updated. By executing the process of step S2108, various parameters at that time are stored in the separate storage area 171 for a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 this time.

If a negative determination is made in step S2106, or if the process of step S2108 is executed, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S2109). That is, in the present embodiment, not only when the history information is read by the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memory is used. The history information 117 is deleted.

After that, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S2110). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2111). In the writing process, the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is referred to identify the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target, and the pointer information corresponds to the writing target pointer information. The RTC information read in step S2110 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the setting value information when the setting is performed, The combination is stored as history information.

After that, the update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S2112). In the update processing, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

According to the above configuration, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memory 117 is stored in the history memory 117 on condition that a predetermined number or more of history information is stored. Various parameters are calculated using the history information, and the various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171. As a result, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, the information of the management result of the game history as a result of the game being substantially played is stored in the separate storage memory 171. It becomes possible to be stored.

Note that the process of step S2109 may be executed on condition that the processes of steps S2107 and S2108 are executed. That is, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is erased on condition that a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the structure of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. First to fourteenth counters 141a to 141n, 142a to 142n, 143a to 143n, 144a to 144n are provided in each of these areas 141 to 144, respectively. Information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the first counters 141a to 144a of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the second counters 141b to 144b of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information about the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the third counters 141c to 144c of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourth counters 141d to 144d of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fifth counters 141e to 144e of each of the areas 141 to 144. The sixth counters 141f to 144f of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the seventh counters 141g to 144g of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eighth counters 141h to 144h of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the ninth counters 141i to 144i of each area 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the tenth counters 141j to 144j of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eleventh counters 141k to 144k in each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the twelfth counters 141l to 144l of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the 14th counters 141n to 144n of each area 141 to 144.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed in the management CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, of the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than the information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the identification is performed. The information of the number that was set is set in the check target counter. In the present pachinko machine 10, since information other than the information indicating that it is blank is stored in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k, "11" is set in the confirmation target counter in step S2201.

After that, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122n corresponding to the current check target counter are buffers to which the signal of the status information is input (step S2202). Specifically, in the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, as correspondence information, information indicating the open/close execution mode, information indicating the high frequency support mode, and It is determined whether any of the information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S2202, state information setting processing is executed (step S2203). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the open/close execution mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the first state indicating that the open/close execution mode is in the management side When the output state of the eighth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, it is stored in the RAM 114, and the information of the first state is deleted from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high frequency support mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the second state indicating that the high frequency support mode is set is displayed on the management side RAM 114 When the output state of the ninth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the second state is erased from the management side RAM 114. In addition, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the third state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open Is stored in the management side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the third state is erased from the management side RAM 114.

When a negative determination is made in step S2202, or when the process of step S2203 is executed, the numerical value information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is , It is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer is switched from the LOW level to the HI level by checking whether or not it has been changed from “0” to “1” ( Step S2204). If the numerical information stored in the eighth buffer 122h is changed from “0” to “1” in a situation where the current value of the check target counter is the value corresponding to the eighth buffer 122h, the process proceeds to step S2203. The information of the first state is stored in the management RAM 114, and a positive determination is made in step S2204. If the numerical value information stored in the ninth buffer 122i is changed from “0” to “1” in a situation where the current value of the check target counter is the value corresponding to the ninth buffer 122i, the process proceeds to step S2203. The second state information is stored in the management side RAM 114, and a positive determination is made in step S2204. If the numerical value information stored in the tenth buffer 122j is changed from “0” to “1” in a situation where the value of the current check target counter is the value corresponding to the tenth buffer 122j, the process proceeds to step S2203. The information of the third state is stored in the management side RAM 114, and a positive determination is made in step S2204.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the corresponding sum counter addition processing is executed (step S2205). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 141a to 141n for summing in the summing area 141 of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the total eleventh counter 141k is the addition target, and if the check target counter value is “5”, the total fifth counter 141e is the addition target, If the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first total counter 141a is the addition target.

Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the open/close execution mode (step S2206). If it is in the first state (step S2206: YES), the addition processing of the corresponding counter for the first state is executed (step S2207). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 142a to 142n for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117 is incremented by 1. .. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh counter 142k for the first state is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 142e for the first state is the addition target. If the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 142a for the first state becomes the addition target.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode (step S2208). If it is in the second state (step S2208: YES), the corresponding counter for the second state is added (step S2209). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 143a to 143n for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117 is incremented by 1. .. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “11”, the eleventh counter 143k for the second state is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 143e for the second state is the addition target. If the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state becomes the addition target.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is open (step S2210). If it is in the third state (step S2210: YES), the corresponding counter for the third state is added (step S2211). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 144a to 144n for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117 is incremented by 1. .. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh counter 144k for the third state is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 144e for the third state is the addition target. If the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the first counter 144a for the third state is the addition target.

When a negative determination is made in step S2204, a negative determination is made in step S2210, or when the processing of step S2211 is executed, the value of the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2213). When the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S2213: NO), the process from step S2202 is executed for the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the number of game balls entered into the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34, and the opening/closing execution The number of times the mode is generated, the number of times the high-frequency support mode is generated, and the number of times the game is generated are not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but are stored as number-of-times information. As a result, the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

Since the number of times is stored as the number of times information instead of the history information, it is not necessary to perform the process of deriving the number of times information from the history information when calculating various parameters. As a result, the processing load for calculating various parameters can be reduced.

Next, the setting update recognition process executed by the management-side CPU 112 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2301: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". It is set (step S2302). The set value grasping counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10. For example, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

After that, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HI level again (step S2303). If an affirmative decision is made in step S2303, the value of the set value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2304). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management-side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

If a negative determination is made in step S2303, or if the process of step S2304 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2305). If a negative determination is made in step S2305, the process returns to step S2303.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S2305, a total eleventh counter 141k for measuring the number of times of game times executed in the total area 141 in the history memory 117, and an opening/closing execution in the total area 141 in the history memory 117 The eighth total counter 141h measuring the number of times of mode occurrence and the total ninth counter 141i measuring the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode in the total area 141 of the history memory 117 are respectively provided. "0" is cleared (step S2306 to step S2308). As a result, the number of times the game is executed, the number of times the open/close execution mode is generated, and the number of times the high-frequency support mode is generated are all cleared to "0" when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. To be done. Therefore, the 31st parameter indicating the number of times of opening and closing execution mode per unit game time, the 41st parameter indicating the number of times of high frequency support mode per unit game time, and the high frequency support mode for the number of times of opening and closing execution mode The calculation result of the 42nd parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game content after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In the configuration in which the winning probability of the jackpot result is changed when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are set to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 as described above. By making the contents corresponding to the game contents after the new setting is performed, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current setting value. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

On the other hand, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the counters other than the eighth total counter 141h, the total ninth counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k in the history memory 117 are " 0” is not cleared. As a result, the management of the number of game balls or the frequency of game balls entering each history-targeted ball input unit is performed based on the long-term game history without being affected by the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible.

According to the above configuration, the number of game balls entered into the outlet 24a, the general prize opening 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34, the number of times the opening/closing execution mode has occurred, and high frequency support. The number of times the mode is generated and the number of times the game is generated are stored not as the history information as in the first embodiment but as the number information. As a result, the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

Further, since the number of pieces of information is stored as the number-of-times information instead of the history information, it is not necessary to perform a process of deriving the number-of-times information from the history information when calculating various parameters. As a result, the processing load for calculating various parameters can be reduced.

Each piece of information on the number of times the game has been executed, the number of times the open/close execution mode has been generated, and the number of times the high-frequency support mode has been generated is cleared to "0" when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Therefore, the 31st parameter indicating the number of times of opening and closing execution mode per unit game time, the 41st parameter indicating the number of times of high frequency support mode per unit game time, and the high frequency support mode for the number of times of opening and closing execution mode The calculation result of the 42nd parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game content after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In the configuration in which the winning probability of the jackpot result is changed when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are set to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 as described above. By making the contents corresponding to the game contents after the new setting is performed, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current setting value. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

On the other hand, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the counters other than the eighth total counter 141h, the total ninth counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k in the history memory 117 are " 0” is not cleared. As a result, the management of the number of game balls or the frequency of game balls entering each history-targeted ball input unit is performed based on the long-term game history without being affected by the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible.

Note that the configuration of the history memory 117 as in this embodiment may be applied to the first to fifth embodiments and the embodiments described after this embodiment. For example, when applied to the first embodiment, the information in the history memory 117 is maintained as it is even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Further, when applied to the third embodiment, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the entire history memory 117 is cleared to "0".

Further, the processing of step S2306 to step S2308 may be executed in the setting update recognition processing (FIG. 41) when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Thereby, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, if the set value is not changed before and after that, information on the number of times the game is executed, information on the number of times the open/close execution mode is generated, and high-frequency support The information of the number of times the mode is generated is not cleared to "0", and when the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the information of the number of times of the game time, the information of the number of times of the open/close execution mode, and the high frequency support mode It is possible to clear the information of the number of occurrences of “0”.

In addition, in the setting update recognition process (FIG. 41), various parameters are calculated using the counters 141 to 144 of the history memory 117 before the processes of steps S2306 to S2308 are executed, and the parameters are calculated. Various parameters may be stored in the calculation result memory 131.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the structure of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

As the history memory 117, history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to “setting 1” to “setting 6”, which are the setting states of the pachinko machine 10, are provided. Specifically, a history memory 181 for setting 1 is provided corresponding to "setting 1", and a history memory 182 for setting 2 is provided corresponding to "setting 2". A history memory 183 for setting 3 is provided corresponding to “setting 3”, a history memory 184 for setting 4 is provided corresponding to “setting 4”, and corresponding to “setting 5”. A history memory 185 for setting 5 is provided, and a history memory 186 for setting 6 is provided corresponding to “setting 6”.

Each of the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6 is provided with a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment. Thereby, it becomes possible to store the history information in association with each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. In this case, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the set value for which the new setting is performed are the storage targets of the history information. It is possible to store the history information separately for each set value without erasing the history information when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Further, since various parameters are calculated using the history information corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 that is currently set, various parameters corresponding to each setting value can be appropriately derived.

In addition, in each of the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6, the total area 141, the first state area 142, the second state area 143, and the third state area 144 in the sixth embodiment are provided. The combination may be set.

Next, the setting update recognition process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2401: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter provided in the calculation result memory 131 Is set to "1" (step S2402). The set value grasping counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10. For example, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6". Further, in the present embodiment, since the set value grasping counter is provided in the operation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require external power supply for storage, it is assumed that the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped. Also, the value stored in the set value grasping counter is stored and held.

Then, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2403). If an affirmative decision is made in step S2403, the value of the set value grasping counter of the operation result memory 131 is incremented by 1 (step S2404). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management-side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

If a negative determination is made in step S2403, or if the processing of step S2404 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2405). When a negative determination is made in step S2405, the process returns to step S2403.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2405, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the values of the set value grasping counter of the calculation result memory 131 are set as the storage target of the history information and the reference target when the various parameters are calculated ( Step S2406). Specifically, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “1”, it means that the setting is set to “setting 1”. Therefore, the history memory 181 for setting 1 is set as the storage target of the history information and various parameters. Set as a reference target during calculation. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “2”, it means that the setting is set to “setting 2”. Therefore, the history memory 182 for setting 2 is used for storing the history information and when calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “3”, it means that the setting is set to “setting 3”. Therefore, the history memory 183 for setting 3 is used for storing the history information and calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “4”, it means that the setting is set to “setting 4”. Therefore, the history memory 184 for setting 4 is set in the history information storage target and when various parameters are calculated. Set as a reference target. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “5”, it means that the setting is set to “setting 5”. Therefore, the history memory 185 for setting 5 is used for storing the history information and when calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "6", it means that the setting is set to "setting 6". Therefore, the history memory 186 for setting 6 is used for storing the history information and calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target.

After that, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S2407). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2408). In the writing process, the history memories 181 to 186 set as the history information storage target in step S2406 are selected from the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6. Then, by referring to the pointer area 126 in the history memories 181 to 186 which are the storage objects, the pointer information of the history area 124 which is the current writing object is specified and becomes the writing object. The RTC information read in step S2407 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information. Further, the information for identifying the set value is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, a combination of the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed is stored as history information.

After that, the target pointer update process is executed (step S2409). In the update processing, the history memories 181 to 186 set as the storage targets of history information in step S2406 are selected from the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6, and the history memories 181 to 186 are selected. The numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

According to the above configuration, as the history memory 117, the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6 are provided so as to correspond to the “setting 1” to the “setting 6”, respectively. As a result, it becomes possible to store the game history in correspondence with each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 of "setting 1" to "setting 6". In this case, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the set value for which the new setting is performed are the storage targets of the history information. It is possible to store the history information separately for each set value without erasing the history information when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Further, since various parameters are calculated using the history information corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 that is currently set, various parameters corresponding to each setting value can be appropriately derived.

It should be noted that the history memory 117 is not limited to the configuration in which six memories of the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6 are provided, and one memory can be used for the setting 1 Corresponding to the history memory 181 for setting 2, the area corresponding to the history memory 182 for setting 2, the area corresponding to the history memory 183 for setting 3, and the history memory 184 for setting 4. An area, an area corresponding to the history memory 185 for setting 5, and an area corresponding to the history memory 186 for setting 6 may be set.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the structure of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

As the history memory 117, a first history memory 191 and a second history memory 192 are provided. Each of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is provided with a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment. In this case, when the history information is stored using one of the history memories 191 and 192 of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. If a certain number of pieces of history information are stored in the other history memories 191 and 192, the history information of the one history memory 191 and 192 is not erased and remains. In addition, it is possible to store history information newly in both history memories 191 and 192 until a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the other history memories 191 and 192. Become.

Next, the setting update recognition process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2501: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is set to " 1” (step S2502). The set value grasping counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the set value of the pachinko machine 10. For example, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

After that, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2503). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, the value of the set value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2504). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management-side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

If a negative determination is made in step S2503, or if the processing of step S2504 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2505). When a negative determination is made in step S2505, the process returns to step S2503.

When a positive determination is made in step S2505, "1" is set to the setting change occurrence flag provided in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2506). The setting change occurrence flag has been set as a storage target of history information until then in the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. This is a flag for the management CPU 112 to specify whether not only the history memories 191 and 192 but also the other history memories 191 and 192 are the storage targets of the history information. Further, since the setting change occurrence flag is provided in the operation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, even if supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped, setting change occurs. The value stored in the flag is stored and retained.

After that, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S2507). Then, the writing process to the history memories 191 and 192 is executed (step S2508). In the writing process, first, the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191 is referenced to specify the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target, and the pointer information of the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S2507 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed, The combination is stored as history information in the first history memory 191. In the writing process, the pointer information 126 of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192, and the pointer that is the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S2507 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the information. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed, The combination is stored in the second history memory 192 as history information.

After that, update processing of each target pointer is executed (step S2509). In the update process, first, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information. In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

Next, the history setting process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When "1" is not set in the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 (step S2601: NO), the side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 that is the storage target is selected. This means that only the history information should be stored. In this case, first, the history memories 191 and 192, which are currently stored, are grasped (step S2602). The calculation result memory 131 is provided with a storage target flag, and when the value of the storage target flag is “0”, the first history memory 191 becomes the storage target and the value of the storage target flag is “1”. If it is, the second history memory 192 is to be stored. Since the storage target flag is provided in the operation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped, the storage target flag is stored. The value of is stored and retained.

After that, the history setting execution processing is executed for the history memories 191 and 192 which are storage targets (step S2603). Specifically, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed for one of the history memories 191 and 192 that are storage targets. As a result, the history information is stored in one of the history memories 191 and 192 that are storage targets.

On the other hand, when “1” is set in the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 (step S2601: YES), it is a storage target of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192. This means that the history information should be stored not only on the side but also on the other side. In this case, history setting execution processing is executed for both history memories 191 and 192 (step S2604). Specifically, first, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed on the first history memory 191. As a result, the history information is stored in the first history memory 191. After that, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed on the second history memory 192. As a result, the history information is stored in the second history memory 192.

When the process of step S2603 is executed or the process of step S2604 is executed, it is determined whether "1" is set in the setting change occurrence flag of the operation result memory 131 (step S2605). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, it is determined whether or not there is a predetermined number or more of ball discharge histories in the history memories 191, 192 that are not to be stored (step S2606). Specifically, when the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is “0”, the first history memory 191 is the storage target, so the game area PA is stored in the second history memory 192. It is determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, "1000") of history information indicating that the game balls have been discharged is stored. Further, when the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is “1”, the second history memory 192 is the storage target, so that the first history memory 191 moves from the game area PA to the game ball. It is determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, “1000”) of history information indicating that the has been discharged is stored. It should be noted that the game time is executed rather than determining whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, “1000”) of history information indicating that the game balls have been discharged from the game area PA is stored. It may be configured to determine whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, “100”) or more of history information indicating is stored.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, a storage target change process is executed (step S2607). In the change processing of the storage object, the value of the storage object flag of the operation result memory 131 is set between the two values to a value different from the current value, so that the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are set. The side to be memorized is changed. Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is “0”, the storage target is changed from the first history memory 191 to the second history memory 192 by setting the storage target flag to “1”. If the value of the storage target flag is “1”, the storage target flag is cleared to “0” to change the storage target from the second history memory 192 to the first history memory 191. As a result, the history memories 191 and 192 in which only the history information of the game executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored are set as storage targets. Then, various parameters are calculated by using the history information of the history memories 191 and 192 which are newly stored, so that it is executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It is possible to derive various parameters depending on the game.

After that, the clear process is executed on the side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 which has been the storage target until then (step S2608). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is "0", the second history memory 192 is cleared to "0", and if the value of the storage target flag is "1", the first history memory 191 is " 0” is cleared. After that, the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0" (step S2609).

Next, the display output processing in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When it is the calculation timing (step S2701: YES), the storage target side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is grasped (step S2702). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is “0”, the first history memory 191 is recognized as the storage target, and if the value of the storage target flag is “1”, the second history memory 191 is stored. The history memory 192 is grasped as a storage target. After that, using the history information stored in the storage target history memories 191 and 192 grasped in step S2702, steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed. By doing so, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameters, fourteenth to forty-second parameters) are calculated, and the calculated various parameters are calculated. The result memory 131 is stored (step S2703). In this case, the history information is stored in both the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 because the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1". Even if there is, various parameters are calculated by using one of the history memories 191 and 192 which are storage targets.

If a negative determination is made in step S2701, or if the process of step S2703 has been executed, the display process is executed (step S2704). The processing content of the display processing is the same as the display processing (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are provided as the history memory 117, and when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, While the history memories 191 and 192 that have been storage targets are directly stored, the history information is also stored in the history memories 191 and 192 that are not storage targets. When a predetermined number or more of history information corresponding to the discharge of the game balls from the game area PA is stored in the history memories 191 and 192 on the side that is not the storage target, it is not the storage target. The history memories 191 and 192 on the side are directly stored, and the history memories 191 and 192 on the side that have been stored until then are cleared to “0”. Thereby, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, it is possible to calculate various parameters using only history information of the game performed at the newly set setting value. Become.

On the other hand, according to the above configuration, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time so as not to appropriately calculate various parameters, the history target to be stored is stored. Memories 191 and 192 remain unchanged. Thereby, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, it is possible to appropriately derive the management result of the game history up to that point.

It should be noted that the history memory 117 is not limited to a configuration in which two memories, a first history memory 191 and a second history memory 192, are provided, and one memory can be used for the first history. The first history area corresponding to the memory 191 and the second history area corresponding to the second history memory 192 may be set.

Alternatively, only one history memory 117 may be provided. In this case, when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than a predetermined number after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. The history information before the specified timing may be erased, and the history information after the setting timing may be stored and retained without being deleted. As a result, at a timing when a predetermined number or more of history information is accumulated after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a history before the timing at which the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It becomes possible to erase information. In addition, the history information corresponding to the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the history memory 117 at the timing when the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. It is possible to distinguish the history information before and the history information after the timing when is performed.

Further, the timing of deleting the history information is not limited to the case where the total number of discharged game balls from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than a predetermined number after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Instead, the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed may be a predetermined number or more.

Further, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the setting value is not changed before and after the new setting, the change of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored and the history information When the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed without erasing, and when the set value is changed before and after that, the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored as described above. May be changed and the history information may be deleted.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I/F 111, the type of the signal whose input signal is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 is the above-mentioned. This is different from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 to specify the type of the input signal to the management CPU 112 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same kind of signal as that of the first embodiment is input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the 16th buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. Two signals are input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning a prize mouth detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric power detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, and the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal, A signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, a signal corresponding to the start of the game game is input to the eleventh buffer 122k as the eleventh signal, and the set value update signal is the fifteenth buffer. However, in the present embodiment, the buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, the signal corresponding to the start of the game round is input to the eleventh buffer 122k as the game round signal, the set value update signal is input to the twelfth buffer 122l, and the signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode is in the open/close execution mode. The signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m as a signal, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n, and the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is the fifteenth door opening signal. It is input to the buffer 122o.

The game time signal is input to the eleventh buffer 122k, the set value update signal is input to the twelfth buffer 122l, the open/close execution mode signal is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the fourteenth buffer 122n. It is decided at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the high frequency support mode input signal, the door opening signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o, and the output instruction signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. Therefore, without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 can specify that the signals corresponding to each of the 11th to 16th buffers 122k to 122p are input. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j has not been determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, and these kinds of signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. As a result, the CPU 112 on the management side specifies. The process for identifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the recognition processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9) as in the first embodiment.

First, "10", which is the number of the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j to be recognized for the signal type, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2801). After that, the output processing of the identification start signal is executed (step S2802). In the output process, the output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode input signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. Is set to the HI level, the output of the identification start signal is started. The period in which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output states of these signals.

After that, the information on the output count corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read output count information is set in the output counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( Step S2803). The output counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the output count of the type identification signal.

In the present embodiment, when the management-side CPU 112 recognizes the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j, the number of prize balls set for the incoming ball portion corresponding to the signal type. And the type identification signal is output the same number of times as. The management-side CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal is received for each of the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116. .. That is, the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j is grasped as the number of prize balls set for the ball entering portion corresponding to the type of the signal.

In step S2803, if the value of the recognition output counter is any of "10", "9" and "8", "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the output number counter. .. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "7", "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is “6”, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first working opening 33 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "5", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second operating port 34 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the output counter for recognition is “4”, the payout of the game ball is not executed even though the game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a. Therefore, the output number counter Set "0" to. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is any one of "3" to "1", since the corresponding ball entry portion does not exist and it is blank, "0" is set in the output number counter.

After that, the output process of the start trigger signal is executed (step S2804). In the output process, the output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to the HI level. The period during which the first signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

Then, on the condition that the value of the output counter of the main RAM 65 is not "0" (step S2805: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or more is set on the output counter in step S2803. The process advances to step S2806. In step S2806, a type identification signal output process is executed. In the output process, the output state of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to the HI level. The period in which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

After that, the value of the output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S2807), and it is determined whether the value of the output counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S2808). When the value of the output counter is 1 or more (step S2808: NO), the process returns to step S2806.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S2805, or if an affirmative decision is made in step S2808, output processing of the termination trigger signal is executed (step S2809). In the output process, the output of the termination trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to the HI level. The period in which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

After that, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S2810), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement by 1 is "0" (step S2811). When the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S2811: NO), the process returns to step S2803, and processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtraction by 1 is executed. To do.

On the other hand, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "0" (step S2811: YES), output processing of the identification end signal is executed (step S2812). In the output process, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode input signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. Is set to the HI level, the output of the identification end signal is started. The period in which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output states of these signals.

Next, the management processing executed in the management CPU 112 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of the operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is started as in the first embodiment.

First, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S2901). If the identification start signal has not been received, the setting update recognition process is executed in step S2902, and then the process of step S2901 is executed again. The processing content of the setting update recognition processing is the same as that of the first embodiment.

When the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S2901: YES), the value of the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S2903). After that, on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the process proceeds to step S2905. In step S2905, it is determined whether the type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63. When the type identification signal is received (step S2905: YES), the value of the reception number counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2906). The reception counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the number of times the type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. The value of the reception number counter is cleared to "0" when a positive determination is made in step S2904.

If a negative determination is made in step S2905, or if the processing of step S2906 is executed, it is determined whether or not an end trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2907). If the termination trigger signal has not been received (step S2907: NO), the process returns to step S2905, and if the termination trigger signal has been received (step S2907: YES), the correspondence relationship setting process is executed (step S2908). In the correspondence relation setting process, among the first to tenth correspondence relation areas 123 a to 123 j of the correspondence relation memory 116, the correspondence relation area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 is set in the reception number counter. Stores the value that is set. In this case, “10” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c, and the fourth correspondence area 123d is set. Is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first working port 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence relationship In the area 123f, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second working port 34 is set. Also, "0" is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123g to 123l. After that, the value of the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2909).

When a negative determination is made in step S2904 or when the processing of step S2909 is executed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S2910). When the reception of the identification end signal is not completed (step S2910: NO), the process returns to step S2904, and on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the processes after step S2905 are performed. Execute. When the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is finished (step S2910: YES), the history setting process of step S2911, the display output process of step S2912, and the external output process of step S2913 are repeatedly executed.

FIG. 51 is a time chart showing a state in which information on the correspondence between the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122j is stored in the correspondence memory 116. 51A shows a period in which the output state of the first signal is at the HI level, FIG. 51B shows a period in which the output state of the second signal is at the HI level, and FIG. ) Indicates a period during which the output state of the third signal is at the HI level, FIG. 51(d) indicates a period during which the output state of the signal in the open/close execution mode is at the HI level, and FIG. FIG. 51(f) shows the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122j, showing the period during which the output state of the signal in the high frequency support mode is at the HI level. 51G shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed, FIG. 51G shows the timing when the value of the reception counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. The timing at which the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process (step S2908) is shown.

As the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 51(a), 51(d) and 51(e), the first signal The output states of the open/close execution mode signal and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from the LOW level to the HI level. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Then, at the timing of t2, the output states of the first signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t2, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative decision in step S2901 of the management processing (FIG. 50), and the identification state is entered as shown in FIG. 51(f).

After that, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t3 to timing t4 as shown in FIG. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. Then, from the timing of t5 to the timing of t7, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51(b). As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management-side CPU 112 once. In this case, the value of the reception number counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG.

After that, from the timing t8 to the timing t10, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51(c). As a result, the termination trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t9, the management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 51(h). Since the value of the reception number counter is “1” at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, the correspondence information of “1” is stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116 for the setting this time. Information is stored.

After that, from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 51( b ), the timing t13 to timing t15, the timing t16 to timing t18, the timing t19 to timing t21, and the timing t22 to timing t24 are changed as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal is maintained at the HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management-side CPU 112 once. In this case, the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 51(g) at each of the timing t14, the timing t17, the timing t20, and the timing t23.

After that, from the timing of t25 to the timing of t27, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51(c). As a result, the termination trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t26, as shown in FIG. 51(h), the management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process. Since the value of the reception number counter is “10” at the timing when the correspondence relation setting process is executed, the correspondence relation information “10” is stored in the correspondence relation memory 123 in the correspondence relation memory 116 as the correspondence relation information 123a to 123j. Information is stored.

Thereafter, at the timing of t28, the output states of the third signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are LOW as shown in FIGS. 51(c), 51(d), and 51(e). Level is changed to HI level. As a result, the main CPU 63 starts outputting the identification end signal to the management CPU 112. After that, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t29, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative decision in step S2910 of the management processing (FIG. 50), so that the identification state is canceled as shown in FIG. 51(f).

Note that, in the present embodiment, since information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is stored in the history information, and the prize balls corresponding to the ball-entering portion that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number of pieces is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, when there are a plurality of types of ball entry parts having the same number of prize balls, the ball entry parts cannot be distinguished in the history information. Specifically, since the number of prize balls for each of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is one, it is possible to distinguish the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information. Can not. In such a situation, the number of prize balls may be different between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. This makes it possible to distinguish the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 in the history information even with the configuration in which the history information is stored as in the present embodiment.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the set value update signal and the output instruction signal, but also information corresponding to whether or not the game number has been started, information corresponding to whether or not in the opening/closing execution mode, Regarding the information corresponding to whether the high frequency support mode is in progress and the information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is open or not, the main CPU 63 indicates that the signal path corresponds to these information. It is possible for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the correspondence relationship information even if it is not received. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection result of each of the ball entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is the information required to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize the correspondence between each information and each signal path 118a to 118j. Become. When causing the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the correspondence information, the same number of pulse signals as the number of prize balls corresponding to each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are transmitted from the main-side CPU 63 to the management-side CPU 112 using the second signal. Is output to. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to the transmission of the correspondence information.

<Tenth Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for providing the information of each ball entry result to the management IC 66. Hereinafter, the configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration of a signal path for allowing the detection results of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a to be input to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. The detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. The detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. The detection result of the special electric power detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. The detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. The detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

A first branch path SL21 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the second branch path SL22 is formed so as to branch from the middle position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a third branch path SL23 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fifth branch path SL25 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without intervention of the processing by the main CPU 63. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes a process for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize the result of entering each of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. Since it is not necessary to do so, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 63.

Further, branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 are present in the MPU 62. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to access the branch point and each of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act in which an abnormal entry result is input only to the management IC 66. ..

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. By the way, the configurations of the following different modes may be applied to the configurations of the above-described embodiments individually or in combination.

(1) As a parameter indicating the frequency of opening/closing execution mode, the number of times of opening/closing execution mode per unit game is calculated. It may be configured to calculate a result obtained by dividing the total number of game balls discharged from the PA. In addition to or instead of this, the result of dividing the number of times the open/close execution mode is generated by the total number of balls entering the first operating port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 is calculated. May be

(2) As a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the high-frequency support mode, the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode per unit game and the ratio of the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode to the number of times of opening/closing execution mode are calculated. However, in addition to or instead of this, the result of dividing the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode by the total number of discharged game balls from the game area PA may be calculated. In addition to or instead of this, the result of dividing the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode by the total number of balls entering the first operation port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 is calculated. It may be configured.

(3) As a game result that triggers the opening and closing execution mode, not only a big hit result but also a small hit result may be present. When the small hit result is obtained, the open/close execution mode is generated, but the win/loss lottery mode and the support mode are not changed before and after the open/close execution mode. In addition, the opening/closing execution mode that results in a small hit may be a low-frequency winning mode. In this case, when the big hit result occurs, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the big hit result is stored in the history memory 117, and when the small hit result occurs, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the small hit result is the history. It may be configured to be stored in the memory 117 for use. Further, in this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 may be used to calculate the parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the big hit result and the parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the small hit result.

(4) Regardless of which type of jackpot result occurs, instead of the configuration in which the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the history memory 117, the history information corresponding to the type of jackpot result. May be stored in the history memory 117. In this case, a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence may be calculated for each type of jackpot result.

(5) Various parameters (first to eighth parameters, first to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameters and fourteenth to forty-second parameters) are calculated periodically, The present invention is not limited to this. For example, various parameters may be calculated when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA reaches the number of calculation triggers (for example, 10,000). The various parameters may be calculated when the supply of the operating power is stopped, and the various parameters may be calculated when the number of times of executing the game times reaches the number of times of calculation (for example, 1000 times). Good. In this case, the history memory 117 may be cleared to “0” at the timing when various parameters are calculated.

(6) All of the 1st to 8th parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter, and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated each time the calculation timing of various parameters comes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one part of the various parameters described above becomes the calculation target at one calculation timing, and the parameter group of the calculation target is sequentially changed at each calculation timing. It may be configured. For example, the first to eighth parameters are calculated at one calculation timing, the first to eighteenth parameters are calculated at the next calculation timing, the second to twenty-sixth parameters are calculated at the next calculation timing, and the next calculation is performed. The 31st parameter and the 41st to 42nd parameters may be calculated at the timing, and thereafter, the calculation target may be repeatedly changed in the above order each time the calculation timing comes. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for calculating the parameters when one calculation timing is reached.

(7) It may be configured such that various parameters are calculated using the history information of the history memory 117 on condition that the game is being played. For example, the calculation of various parameters may be performed on condition that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA. This makes it possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being unnecessarily repeated even when a game is not being played.

(8) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the management IC 66 is provided separately from the main CPU 63, and the main IC 63 may perform the function of the management IC 66. In this case, the correspondence information is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. The history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 may be provided separately from the main RAM 65. In the main RAM 65, the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate memory The configuration may be such that the function of the storage memory 171 is fulfilled. In the configuration in which the functions of the history memory 117, the operation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 are fulfilled in the main RAM 65, the history data is recorded when the main RAM 65 clear processing (step S105, step S117) is executed. A part or all of the area corresponding to each of the memory 117, the operation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 may be cleared to “0”, and the history memory 117, the operation result memory 131, and the separate storage. Areas corresponding to the respective memory 171 may be excluded from the target of “0” clear, and “0” may be cleared when the corresponding clear condition in each of the above embodiments is satisfied. Further, in the main side RAM 65, the manual operation contents for executing the clear processing may be different between the areas corresponding to the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131 and the separate storage memory 171 and the other areas. Good. The function of the management IC 66 may be fulfilled by the sound emission control device 81.

(9) When a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information in the history memory 117 is stored and held without being erased, while various types of information stored in the calculation result memory 131 are stored. The parameter may be deleted. This makes it possible to prevent the notification of the various parameters calculated before the setting is performed after the new setting of the setting state is performed.

(10) In the third to fifth embodiments, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed (that is, even if the main CPU 63 executes the setting value update process), If the set value is not changed before and after the setting, the history memory 117 may not be cleared. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased even though the set value has not been changed.

In this configuration, the area for storing the setting value in the main RAM 65 is excluded from the target of clearing "0" even if the clearing processing (step S117) is executed. It becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the set value has been changed before and after step S118). In this case, when the main CPU 63 specifies that the setting value has not been changed, the management CPU 112 outputs a signal to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is not executed, and the main CPU 63 When it is specified that the setting value has been changed in, the management side CPU 112 may output a signal to the management side CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is executed.

When a signal indicating that a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 has been set is received from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 refers to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether or not the set value has been changed. In this case, when the management side CPU 112 specifies that the setting value has not been changed, the clearing process of the history memory 117 is not executed, and the management side CPU 112 specifies that the setting value has been changed. In this case, it is possible to execute the clearing process of the history memory 117.

(11) In the third to fifth embodiments, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed (that is, even if the main CPU 63 executes the set value updating process), When the setting value is not changed before and after the setting, the arithmetic processing of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the setting state may not be executed. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the various parameters from being calculated when the setting value is newly set, even though the setting value has not been changed.

In this configuration, the area for storing the setting value in the main RAM 65 is excluded from the target of clearing "0" even if the clearing processing (step S117) is executed. It becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the set value has been changed before and after step S118). In this case, when the main CPU 63 specifies that the setting value has not been changed, the management CPU 112 outputs a signal to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is not executed, and the main CPU 63 When it is specified that the setting value has been changed in, the management side CPU 112 may output a signal to the management side CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is executed.

When a signal indicating that a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 has been set is received from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 refers to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether or not the set value has been changed. In this case, when it is determined that the setting value has not been changed by the management-side CPU 112, the calculation of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the current setting state is not executed, and the setting is performed by the management-side CPU 112. When it is specified that the value has been changed, it is possible to execute the calculation of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the current setting state.

(12) In the third to fifth embodiments, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, various parameters may be calculated by various calculation processes (step S1807) at that time. Instead, the various parameters stored in the operation result memory 131 at that time are stored in the storage target area of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171, and the calculation is performed. The information stored in the result memory 131 may be cleared to “0”. In this case, since it is not necessary to calculate various parameters under the situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to complete the storage of various parameters in the separate storage memory 171 at an early stage. Become.

(13) In the third to fifth embodiments, the contents of various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 are changed by performing a predetermined display start operation. It may be configured to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c or another display device. The predetermined display start operation may be performed by operating a dedicated operation unit, or may be performed by performing a predetermined dedicated operation on an operation unit for performing another operation. This makes it possible to easily check various parameters stored in the separate storage memory 171.

(14) All of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 are set as the storage targets of the history information (or the entry history). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 is the storage target of the history information. May be For example, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the second operating opening 34 may be the target of storing history information, or the general winning opening 31 may be the target of storing history information. It’s good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the entering mode of the game ball in a predetermined period for the entering part for which the history information is stored.

(15) A signal path for transmitting information corresponding to the result of entering a game ball in association with each of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. Although the configuration in which 118a to 118c are set is not limited to this, the information corresponding to the ball entry result for the same type of ball entry portion includes a plurality of the same type of ball entry portions. In addition to the configuration in which there are a plurality of ball entrance detection sensors in accordance with that, it may be configured to be transmitted as one type of information. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

(16) The correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. The present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in advance in the management IC 66. In this case, since it is not necessary to execute the processing for causing the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 63.

(17) The correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. Although the configuration is performed at the start of supplying the operating power, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 can be bidirectionally communicated with each other, and the management IC 66 requests transmission of correspondence information. The correspondence information may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal is received. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped to the main CPU 63. Even if the supply of operating power is stopped, the correspondence relationship memory 116 stores and holds it. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the correspondence information is transmitted.

(18) The correspondence detection information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 indicates the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o. The configuration is performed using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the information of the detection results of 42a to 48a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information is transferred from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. A dedicated signal path for transmission may be provided. As a result, the management IC 66 can grasp which type of information is being received from the main CPU 63 by the type of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

(19) Although the information is transmitted from the management CPU 66 to the management IC 66 while the information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the management CPU 66, the invention is not limited to this. Information may be transmitted to the side CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management-side CPU 112 based on history information may be transmitted to the main-side CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute the notification control of the notification means so that the notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters is performed. By transmitting the command corresponding to the content of the parameter to the voice emission control device 81, the notification corresponding to the content of the various parameters is executed by using the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. It may be configured to.

(20) When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, various parameters are calculated by the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the calculated parameters are calculated. The contents of various parameters may be notified by using the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the like. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the entering mode of the game ball in the game area PA on the last business day is normal at the start of the game hall business.

(21) When various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 cannot start the game until the prohibition cancel operation is performed. May be As a configuration that prevents the game from being started, for example, a configuration in which the game ball is prohibited to be launched, a configuration in which each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a may be invalidated, and a first operation opening It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the win/no determination process is not executed even if a win is generated in 33 or the second operating port 34. Further, the prohibition canceling operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again while the reset button 68c is being pressed, and can be operated when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the outer frame 11. Alternatively, the operation means may be operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the game balls in the game area PA are in an abnormal mode. Further, it is possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is abnormal.

(22) Although history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, calculation of various parameters using the history information is performed by either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. The configuration may be such that it is not executed. In this case, the history information may be read by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and the operator of the reading operation may calculate various parameters using the read history information. Of course, the external device may be configured to execute various parameter calculations using the read history information. In this case, the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 can be reduced.

(23) The management IC 66 is provided with a power source separate from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters using history information. Alternatively, the history information or the information of various parameters may be output. As a result, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the history information and various parameters can be read by the external device.

(24) The reading terminal 68d used to read the program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used to read history information or various parameters by an external device, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters by the external device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 68d for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminal used to read the history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62, or may be provided in a position different from the MPU 62 in the main control board 61.

(25) The correspondence relationship memory 116, the history memory 117, and the operation result memory 131 are not limited to the configuration provided as a non-volatile storage means such as a flash memory, and for example, these memories 116, 117, 131. Is provided as a volatile storage means that requires power supply to store and hold information, and the backup power is supplied to the memory to stop the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63. However, the information may be stored and held. In this case, a dedicated backup power device may be provided for that memory, or a configuration in which backup power is supplied to the memory from a power supply/launch control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main RAM 65. Good.

(26) The management IC 66 includes the management-side CPU 112 as a general-purpose CPU, and is not limited to the configuration that executes history information storage processing and various parameter calculation processing based on programs and data stored in the management-side ROM 113. Alternatively, a hard circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66. More specifically, regarding the configuration, for example, in the case of the first embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives from the main CPU 63 a signal indicating that one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a has detected a game ball. The correspondence relation information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored in the history memory 117 from the correspondence relation memory 116, and the RTC 115 information at that time is stored in the history memory 117. To do. Further, for example, in the case of the sixth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that the game ball is detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main CPU 63, that signal is received. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by 1. In addition, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters by using the history information at the time when the calculation trigger in the first embodiment or the like occurs. Further, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 68d is generated, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters that are calculation results and the history information.

(27) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as a separate board, or may be provided as a separate control device.

(28) Regarding the number of game balls entering the out port 24a, the number of game balls is measured, while the number of game balls such as the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 History information including RTC information may be stored with respect to payout of a prize ball or entry into the privilege opportunity entry portion that triggers the prize determination process. As a result, it is possible to calculate the frequency of game balls entering each privilege opportunity ball unit with respect to the total number of discharged game balls, while allowing the history of game balls entering the privilege opportunity ball unit to be extracted. Become.

(29) The predetermined event that triggers the storage of the history information may include those other than those in the above embodiments. For example, at least one of the timing when the lower tray 56a is full, the timing when the full tank is started, and the timing when the full tank is released may be stored as history information. At least one of the time when the no-ball state is started, the timing when the no-ball state is started, and the timing when the no-ball state is released may be stored as history information, and the payout device 76 is in an abnormal state. That is, at least one of the timing when the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 is started and the timing when the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 is released may be stored as the history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the occurrence frequency of these events.

(30) In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I/F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal is set in advance in the design stage of the management IC 66. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal and is also recognized by the management IC 66 by the type identification command transmitted from the main CPU 63. May be Further, in the first embodiment, it is set in advance that the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the management-side I/F 111 corresponds to the set value update signal in the design stage of the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the fifteenth buffer 122o corresponds to the set value update signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by the type identification command being transmitted from the main CPU 63. It may be configured. In this case, it is not necessary to previously set the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p in the management IC 66 in advance.

(31) The management IC 66 may be configured to send a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when operating normally. In this case, it becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(32) The display device that displays the setting value being updated in the setting value update process (FIG. 10) is not limited to the third notification display device 69c, and may be the symbol display device 41, or a dedicated display device. Display device.

(33) The operation unit operated to update the set value in the set value update process (FIG. 10) is not limited to the update button 68b and may be the reset button 68c. Further, the position corresponding to each of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is set as the rotation operation position when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and the rotation operation is performed. A set value corresponding to the rotational operation position of the portion 68a may be set. In addition, the setting key insertion portion 68a is configured to be able to be rotated further than the ON position, and each time the rotating operation beyond the ON position is performed, the set value being updated becomes the set value in the next order. The configuration may be updated.

(34) Display control based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the sound emission control device 81 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The device 82 may control the audio emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are separately provided, both the control devices may be provided as one control device, and the function of one of the both control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 60, and both functions of the both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 60. Also, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are arbitrary.

(35) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrange ball machine, a sparrow ball, or the like.

Also, a non-ball-ball type gaming machine, for example, provided with a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reel is started by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels stop after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can be applied to a slot machine.

Further, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame to be openable and closable includes a storage part and a loading device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage part are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined so that the reels start to rotate.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, for example, the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination executed when one game is started based on the operation of the start lever is history information. It may be configured such that the actual winning probability of each winning combination is calculated by using the history information, and when a transition to a special game state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information and the history thereof is stored. The information may be used to calculate the actual transition probability to the special game state, or the ratio of the number of stay games in the special game state to the total number of exhausted games may be calculated. Then, the history information and various parameters may be readable by an external device, or the gaming machine itself may give a notification corresponding to a calculation result of the various parameters. Further, it may be configured such that there are a plurality of stages of setting states such as “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and the winning probability in the lottery process of the winning combination is changed according to the setting state. In this case, the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments may be applied to the handling of history information when the setting of the setting state is newly set or the setting value is changed, the calculation of various parameters, and the handling of repeated changes. ..

(36) The characteristic configurations of the first to tenth embodiments may be mutually applied in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the tenth embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment may be combined. You may combine the characteristic structure of embodiment, the characteristic structure of the said 4th embodiment, and the characteristic structure of the said 8th embodiment. Further, in addition to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the above-described first to tenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination, the configuration in the above-described another mode may be applied in an arbitrary combination.

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. It should be noted that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in brackets or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (a function for executing the setting value updating process in the main CPU 63),
When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
An information erasing unit that erases at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage unit under at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit (third part). In the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1809 in the management-side CPU 112, the function of executing the process of step S2109 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the function of performing the process of step S2109 in the management-side CPU 112 in the sixth embodiment. A function of executing the process of S2308, a function of executing the process of step S2608 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic A1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can set the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. Further, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history information storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification.

In this case, at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage means is deleted under the condition that at least one of the setting values to be used is newly set. This makes it possible to adjust the content of the history storage means so that the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation after the new setting of the setting value to be used is performed can be suitably performed. ..

Feature A2. A ball entering means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball input means.
An assignment determination unit that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S503 and S504);
A privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the probability of being the assignment correspondence result in the assignment determination varies according to the setting value.

According to the characteristic A2, it is possible to change the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the so-called pachinko machine according to the set value. In this case, since the configuration of the characteristic A1 is provided, it is possible to suitably manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the situation after the probability of the assignment correspondence result is changed. It is possible to adjust the content.

Features A3. The information erasing means erases all of the history information stored in the history storage means under at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means. The game machine according to A1 or A2.

According to the characteristic A3, all the history information stored in the history information storage means is erased when the setting value to be used is newly set, so that the setting value to be used is changed. It is possible to specify the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event based on the timing when the setting is newly performed.

Features A4. The information erasing means erases a part of the history information stored in the history storage means under at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that a part of the history information stored in the history storage means is left.

According to the characteristic A4, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information unnecessary for the management of the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event thereafter is deleted and the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event is managed thereafter. It becomes possible to leave necessary history information. As a result, it becomes possible to preferably manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event after the setting value to be used is newly set.

Features A5. The history information stored in the history storage means includes first history information (a history indicating that an open/close execution mode has occurred) in which the probability of occurrence of the predetermined event corresponding to the history information varies according to the set value. Information) and second history information (history information indicating that a game ball has been discharged from the game area PA) that does not change according to the set value.
The information erasing means erases the first history information stored in the history storing means on the condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, at least one condition, The gaming machine according to feature A4, characterized in that the second history information stored in the history storage means is left.

According to the characteristic A5, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the first history information corresponding to the predetermined event in which the occurrence probability changes according to the setting value is erased, and the occurrence probability is set to the setting value. The second history information corresponding to the predetermined event that does not fluctuate according to is not deleted. As a result, when the first history information before the setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed is taken over after the setting of the setting value is newly performed, a predetermined event corresponding to the first history information occurs. It is possible to delete the first history information, which is not preferable for specifying the frequency, when the setting of the setting value is newly performed. On the other hand, the second history information is referred to when the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event corresponding to the second history information is specified by not deleting even if the setting value to be used is newly set. Since it is possible to secure a large number of second history information, it is possible to accurately specify the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event corresponding to the second history information.

Features A6. A ball entering means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball input means.
An assignment determination unit that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S503 and S504);
A privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Equipped with
It is a configuration in which the probability of being the assignment correspondence result in the assignment determination varies according to the setting value,
The first history information includes information corresponding to the grant of the privilege,
The game machine according to feature A5, wherein the second history information includes information corresponding to a game ball being discharged from the game area in a predetermined manner.

According to the characteristic A6, since the privilege granting probability varies depending on the set value, the first history information should be deleted when the setting of the set value to be used is newly set. Thus, it is possible to specify the privilege grant frequency under the condition of the newly set setting value. On the other hand, since the frequency with which the game balls are discharged from the game area does not change according to the set value, the second history information is not deleted even if a new set value to be used is set. It is possible to accurately specify the frequency with which the game balls are discharged from the game area in a predetermined manner.

Features A7. At least the history information is deleted when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means and when the history storage means stores a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, which is characterized by erasing a part.

According to the feature A7, when the predetermined history information is not stored in the history storage unit in the predetermined amount or more, the history information is not deleted even if a new setting value to be used is set. As a result, even if a new setting of the set value is repeated in a situation where the game is not played, it is possible to prevent the history information stored in the history storage means from being repeatedly erased.

Feature A8. Using at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means is set, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to obtain the result of the game in a predetermined period. Information deriving means for deriving corresponding mode information (a function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment) The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, which is characterized by being provided.

According to the characteristic A8, at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage means is provided with the configuration of the characteristic A1 and at least one condition is that a new setting value to be used is set. In the configuration to be deleted, a mode corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means, triggered by the new setting of the setting value to be used Information is derived. As a result, even if at least a part of the history information is deleted when the setting value is changed, the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed is grasped. It becomes possible to do.

Features A9. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, further comprising a mode information storage unit (separate storage memory 171) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation unit.

According to the characteristic A9, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is used by using the history information stored in the history storage means when the setting value to be used is newly set. Is derived, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage means. As a result, even if the set value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the set value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

Feature A10. The amusement machine according to feature A9, wherein the aspect information storage means can store a plurality of the aspect information.

According to the characteristic A10, since it is possible to store a plurality of mode information in the mode information storage means, the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods is grasped on the basis of the timing when the new setting of the setting value is performed. It becomes possible to do. Further, even if new setting of the set value is repeated under the situation where the game is not played, the aspect information derived by utilizing the history information of the situation where the game is substantially played is the aspect information storage means. It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in.

Feature A11. The aspect information storage means can store a predetermined number of the aspect information,
The gaming machine is a means for executing special processing when the setting value to be used by the setting means is set a predetermined number of times under a predetermined condition (in the third embodiment, in the management CPU 112). The gaming machine according to the feature A9 or A10, which is provided with a function of executing a monitoring process of repeated changes, and a function of performing a monitoring process of repeated changes in the main CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment.

According to the characteristic A11, the set value is set in a situation where the game is not played so that the aspect information derived by utilizing the history information of the situation in which the game is substantially played does not remain in the aspect information storage means. When the new setting of is repeated, special processing is executed for it. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

Feature A12. The game machine according to any one of features A8 to A11, wherein the information deriving unit derives the aspect information when the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage unit in a predetermined amount or more. ..

According to the characteristic A12, since the form information is derived when the predetermined amount of history information is stored in the history storage means in a predetermined amount or more, it is possible to prevent the form information from being unnecessarily derived. ..

Feature A13. The information erasing means erases the history information from when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means until a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means. Without setting the set value to be used by the setting unit before the setting of the set value is performed when the history information is stored in the history storage unit in a predetermined amount or more. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, characterized in that the history information stored in the history storage means is erased.

According to the characteristic A13, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history information storage unit, even if a new setting value to be used is newly set, before the setting is performed. The stored history information is not deleted. As a result, even if a new setting value is set, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period.

Feature A14. The history storage unit includes a first history storage unit (first history memory 191) and a second history storage unit (second history memory 192),
The history storage executing means,
When the predetermined event occurs in a predetermined period from when the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit to when a release condition is satisfied, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the first history storage unit and Means for storing in both of the second history storage means (function of executing the processing of step S2604 in the management side CPU 112);
When the predetermined event occurs in a period other than the predetermined period, a unit that stores the corresponding history information in the side set as a storage target of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit (Function of executing the process of step S2603 in the management CPU 112),
Equipped with
The information erasing means erases the history information stored in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that has been set as the storage target until then, when the cancellation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13.

According to the characteristic A14, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history information storage means, even if a new setting value to be used is set, it is stored before the setting is performed. The history information that was used is not deleted. As a result, even if a new setting value is set, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period. Further, the effect can be brought about only by appropriately changing the history storage means for storing history information between the first history storage means and the second history storage means.

Feature A15. Using the history information stored on the side set as the storage target of the first history storage means and the second history storage means, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived. The gaming machine according to Feature A14, which is provided with an information deriving unit (a function of the management-side CPU 112 that executes the process of step S2703).

According to the characteristic A15, even if the history information is stored in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means due to the new setting of the setting value, the aspect using the history information It is possible to appropriately derive the information.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features A1 to A15, any one or a plurality of configurations of the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, and the features F1 to F3. May be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (a function for executing the setting value updating process in the main CPU 63),
When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Equipped with
The predetermined history information stored in the history storage unit before the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is performed by the setting unit to set the setting value to be used. A gaming machine, which is stored and held in the history storage means even after being played.

According to the characteristic B1, the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, so that the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. Further, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history information storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification.

In this case, even if the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information stored in the history storage means is not erased but stored and retained. As a result, even if the setting value to be used is set, the history information up to that point can be continuously stored in the history storage unit, and accumulated in the history storage unit for a long period of time. It is possible to specify the management result of the game history by using the history information.

Feature B2. The history storage executing means stores the history information corresponding to the setting value to be used in the history storing means when the setting value is set by the setting means. In the embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing the process of step S1307, and in the seventh embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing the process of step S2408). Machine.

According to the characteristic B2, even if the setting value to be used is newly set, the setting value to be used is newly set in the configuration in which the history information is not deleted and stored and retained. The history information corresponding to that is stored in the history storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to distinguish between the history information before the setting value to be used is newly set and the history information after the setting value is newly set.

Feature B3. When the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, the storage execution unit at the time of setting stores information corresponding to the set value set in the history storage unit as the history information. The gaming machine according to feature B2.

According to the feature B3, it is possible to specify the content of the setting value set in the past by referring to the history information.

Feature B4. The history storage means includes a plurality of corresponding history storage means (history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of setting values that can be set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B3.

According to the feature B4, since the correspondence history storage means is provided corresponding to each set value, it is possible to store the history information separately for each set value.

Feature B5. When the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the correspondence history storage means corresponding to the set value is set as a target for storing the history information thereafter (management side) (A function of executing the process of step S2406 in the CPU 112) The gaming machine according to feature B4.

According to the feature B5, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the corresponding history storage unit corresponding to the setting value is set as the subsequent storage object of the history information. It is possible to distinguish and store the history information.

Feature B6. Information derivation means (display output processing in the management-side CPU 112) that derives mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the correspondence history storage means that is the storage target The game machine according to feature B5, which is provided with a function for executing.

According to the feature B6, in the configuration in which the history information is stored separately for each set value, it becomes possible to derive the mode information corresponding to the currently set set value.

Feature B7. A ball entering means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball input means.
An assignment determination unit that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S503 and S504);
A privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein the probability of being the assignment correspondence result in the assignment determination varies according to the setting value.

According to the feature B7, it is possible to change the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the so-called pachinko machine according to the set value.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features B1 to B7, any one or a plurality of configurations of the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, and the features F1 to F3. May be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (a function for executing the setting value updating process in the main CPU 63),
When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
After setting the setting value to be used by the setting means, the history information is not erased until at least a predetermined amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage means. (A function of executing the processing of steps S2506 and S2605 to S2609 in the management-side CPU 112),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic C1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player sets the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. Further, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history information storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification.

In this case, until a specific amount of the predetermined history information is newly stored in the history information storage means, even if a new setting value to be used is set, it is stored before the setting. The history information that was used is not deleted. As a result, even if a new setting value is set, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period.

Feature C2. The post-setting correspondence means sets the set value when a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the history information stored in the history storage unit is erased before being performed.

According to the characteristic C2, when the history storage means stores a specific amount of history information that enables the management result of the game history to be specified in a predetermined period after the new setting of the setting value is performed. The history information stored in the history information storage unit before the new setting of the set value is performed is deleted. This makes it possible to prevent wasteful history information from being continuously stored in the history information storage means.

Feature C3. The history storage unit includes a first history storage unit (first history memory 191) and a second history storage unit (second history memory 192),
The history storage executing means,
When the predetermined event occurs, a unit for storing the history information corresponding to the side set as a storage target in the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit (step S2603 in the management-side CPU 112). Function that executes the processing of
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, the predetermined history information is stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. A means for storing the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means until the predetermined amount or more is stored (management side CPU 112). Function for executing the process of step S2604 in step 2),
Equipped with
After the setting, the corresponding means is
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, the predetermined history information is stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit which is not set as the storage target. A means for changing the storage target between the first history storage means and the second history storage means (a function of executing the processing of step S2607 in the management side CPU 112) when the specific amount or more is stored;
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, the predetermined history information is stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit which is not set as the storage target. When more than the specific amount is stored, a unit that erases the history information on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that has been set as the storage target until then (step S2608 in the management-side CPU 112). Function that executes the processing of
The gaming machine described in the feature C1 or C2, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic C3, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history information storage means, even if a new setting value to be used is set, it is stored before the setting is made. The history information that was used is not deleted. As a result, even if a new setting value is set, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period. Further, the effect can be brought about only by appropriately changing the history storage means for storing history information between the first history storage means and the second history storage means.

Feature C4. Using the history information stored on the side set as the storage target of the first history storage means and the second history storage means, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived. The gaming machine according to feature C3, which is provided with an information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S2703 in the management-side CPU 112).

According to the characteristic C4, even if the history information is stored in both the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit due to the new setting of the set value, the mode in which the history information is used It is possible to appropriately derive the information.

Feature C5. A ball entering means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball input means.
An assignment determination unit that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S503 and S504);
A privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4, wherein the probability of being the granting correspondence result in the granting determination varies according to the setting value.

According to the characteristic C5, it is possible to change the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the so-called pachinko machine according to the set value.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features C1 to C5, any one or a plurality of configurations of the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, and the features F1 to F3. May be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (a function for executing the setting value updating process in the main CPU 63),
Special execution means for executing special processing on the condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been executed in a special situation (in the third embodiment, monitoring of repeated changes in the management CPU 112) A function of executing processing, a function of executing monitoring processing of repeated changes in the main CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment, and a function of making negative determination in step S2106 of the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic D1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. In this case, the special process is executed on the condition that the new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in the special situation. This makes it possible to deal with a case where a new setting value is set in an unfavorable situation.

Feature D2. Characteristic D1 characterized in that the special execution means executes the special processing under at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been executed a specific number of times or more in the special situation. Gaming machine described in.

According to the characteristic D2, even if a new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in the special situation, the special process is not executed when the execution frequency is less than the specific frequency. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the special process from being executed until the regular worker performs new setting of the set value less than the specified number of times in the special situation.

Feature D3. The special execution means, as the special situation, a situation in which a game is not being performed after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, or the setting value to be used is set by the setting means. In a situation in which the game has not been played over a predetermined reference since the game was performed, it is possible to execute the special process with at least one condition that the setting of the set value to be used by the setting means has been executed. The gaming machine described in the characteristic D1 or D2.

According to the feature D3, special processing is executed when a new setting of the setting value to be used is performed in a situation where no game is being played or a situation where a game is not substantially being played, When the act is performed, it becomes possible to deal with it.

Feature D4. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the special execution means executes a notification process as the special process.

According to the characteristic D4, the notification process is executed under at least one condition that the new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in the special situation. As a result, when a new setting value is set in an unfavorable situation, it is possible to prompt the user to deal with it.

Feature D5. When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Using at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means is set, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to obtain the result of the game in a predetermined period. Information deriving means for deriving corresponding mode information (a function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment), ,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D4, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic D5, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history information storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification.

In this case, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is used by using the history information stored in the history storage means. Derived. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed.

Feature D6. The special execution means, as at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been executed in the special situation, as the special processing, derives the aspect information by the information deriving means. The gaming machine according to feature D5, which is characterized in that the game is not performed.

According to the feature D6, even if a new setting value to be used is set, the aspect information is not derived when the setting value is set in an unfavorable situation. This makes it possible to prevent the aspect information from being unnecessarily derived.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to feature D5 or D6, characterized by further comprising mode information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to the characteristic D7, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is utilized by using the history information stored in the history storage means when the setting value to be used is newly set. Is derived, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage means. As a result, even if the set value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the set value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

Feature D8. The gaming machine according to Feature D7, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the aspect information.

According to the characteristic D8, since it is possible to store a plurality of mode information in the mode information storage means, the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods is grasped with reference to the timing at which the new setting of the setting value is made. It becomes possible to do. Further, even if new setting of the set value is repeated under the situation where the game is not played, the aspect information derived by utilizing the history information of the situation where the game is substantially played is the aspect information storage means. It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in.

Feature D9. The aspect information storage means can store a predetermined number of the aspect information,
Characteristic D7 characterized in that the special execution means executes the special processing when the setting value to be used by the setting means is set a number of times exceeding the predetermined number in the special situation. Or the gaming machine described in D8.

According to the characteristic D9, the set value is set in a situation where the game is not played so that the manner information stored in the manner information storage means does not retain the situation information derived by using the history information of the situation in which the game is substantially played. When the new setting of is repeated, special processing is executed for it. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

Feature D10. A ball entering means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball input means.
An assignment determination unit that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S503 and S504);
A privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D9, wherein the probability of being the grant corresponding result in the grant determination varies according to the set value.

According to the characteristic D10, it is possible to change the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the so-called pachinko machine according to the set value.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features D1 to D10, any one or a plurality of configurations of the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, and the features F1 to F3. May be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (a function for executing the setting value updating process in the main CPU 63),
When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Using at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means is set, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to obtain the result of the game in a predetermined period. Information deriving means for deriving corresponding mode information (a function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment), ,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic E1, the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of the plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage degree of the player, so that the player sets the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. Further, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history information storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification.

In this case, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is used by using the history information stored in the history storage means. Derived. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, comprising a mode information storage unit (separate storage memory 171) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation unit.

According to the feature E2, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is utilized by using the history information stored in the history storage means in response to the new setting of the setting value to be used. Is derived, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage means. As a result, even if the set value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the set value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the aspect information.

According to the characteristic E3, since it is possible to store a plurality of aspect information in the aspect information storage means, the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods is grasped on the basis of the timing at which the new setting value is set. It becomes possible to do. Further, even if new setting of the set value is repeated under the situation where the game is not played, the aspect information derived by utilizing the history information of the situation where the game is substantially played is the aspect information storage means. It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in.

Feature E4. The aspect information storage means can store a predetermined number of the aspect information,
The gaming machine is a means for executing special processing when the setting value to be used by the setting means is set a predetermined number of times under a predetermined condition (in the third embodiment, in the management CPU 112). The gaming machine according to the feature E2 or E3, which is provided with a function of executing monitoring processing of repeated changes, a function of executing monitoring processing of repeated changes in the main CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment).

According to the characteristic E4, the set value is set in a situation where the game is not played so that the aspect information derived by using the history information of the situation in which the game is substantially played does not remain in the aspect information storage means. When the new setting of is repeated, special processing is executed for it. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the information deriving unit derives the aspect information when the history storage unit stores a predetermined amount or more of the history information. ..

According to the feature E5, the aspect information is derived when the history storage means stores a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information, and thus it is possible to prevent the situation information from being unnecessarily derived. Become.

Feature E6. A ball entering means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball input means.
An assignment determination unit that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S503 and S504);
A privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E5, wherein the probability of being the granting correspondence result in the granting determination varies according to the setting value.

According to the feature E6, it is possible to change the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the so-called pachinko machine according to the set value.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features E1 to E6, any one or more configurations of the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, and the features F1 to F3. May be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the characteristic A group, the characteristic B group, the characteristic C group, the characteristic D group, and the characteristic E group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player is provided on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage part is a game ball launch. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. A ball entering means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball input means.
An assignment determination unit that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S503 and S504);
A privilege granting means (step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (a function for executing the setting value updating process in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
The grant determination means has a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode so that the probability of the grant-corresponding result is relatively high or low, as the mode of the grant determination.
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of being the assignment correspondence result varies at least in the low probability mode according to the set value.

According to the feature F1, it is possible to vary the probability of the assignment correspondence result in at least the low probability mode in the so-called pachinko machine according to the set value. As a result, even in the case of a single gaming machine, it is possible to cause a situation in which the probability of being the assignment correspondence result in the low probability mode is advantageous or disadvantageous. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the high probability mode does not change according to the set value.

According to the characteristic F2, the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the low probability mode is changed according to the set value, while the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the high probability mode is not changed according to the set value. By doing so, it becomes possible to limit the influence of the set value to the situation in the low probability mode.

Feature F3. There are several types of benefits,
The amusement machine according to the characteristic F1 or F2, wherein the selection mode of the privilege does not change according to the set value.

According to the feature F3, the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the low probability mode is changed according to the set value, while the privilege selection mode is not changed according to the set value, so that the influence of the set value is affected. Can be restricted to situations in the low probability mode.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features F1 to F3, any one or more configurations of the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, and the features F1 to F3. May be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the characteristic F group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko game machine, a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player is provided on the front face of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device. , Is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game ball stored in the upper plate storage part is a game ball launch. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The following is a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in the area, and gives a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

Rotating type gaming machine such as slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and caused by the operation of the stop operation means In addition, or after elapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped, and a gaming machine that gives a privilege to the player according to the stopped pattern.

10... Pachinko machine, 33... First operating port, 34... Second operating port, 63... Main CPU, 112... Management CPU, 117... History memory, 171... Separate storage memory, 181-186... Setting 1 6 to 6 history memory, 191... First history memory, 192... Second history memory.

Claims (2)

Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
History storage executing means for storing history information of the game corresponding to the predetermined event due to the execution of the game in the history storage means,
Information derivation means for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means,
First display control means for controlling the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information deriving means is performed,
In a changeable situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed, the information corresponding to the currently selected setting value is displayed while the display corresponding to the mode information is not performed. Second display control means for controlling the display of the information display means,
The setting value to be used set in the changeable situation is stored in the history storage means in a specific situation in which the setting value to be used is the same as the setting value set before the start of the changeable situation. Means for preventing the history information that is present from being deleted,
Erase, which is a process performed after the process for changing the setting value to be used in the changeable state is executed, and is a process for deleting the history information stored in the history storage means Means for performing processing,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein a game is played by utilizing a game value.

Images